WO2010073732A1 - 通信装置 - Google Patents
通信装置 Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2010073732A1 WO2010073732A1 PCT/JP2009/007319 JP2009007319W WO2010073732A1 WO 2010073732 A1 WO2010073732 A1 WO 2010073732A1 JP 2009007319 W JP2009007319 W JP 2009007319W WO 2010073732 A1 WO2010073732 A1 WO 2010073732A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- information
- server
- image
- unit
- communication
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 776
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims description 310
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 claims description 43
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 182
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 152
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 124
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 104
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 101
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 82
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 56
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 49
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 35
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 34
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 33
- 102220511583 Kappa-casein_N10A_mutation Human genes 0.000 description 31
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 30
- 238000007639 printing Methods 0.000 description 26
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 22
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 20
- 230000001133 acceleration Effects 0.000 description 19
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 18
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 16
- 230000010365 information processing Effects 0.000 description 15
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 15
- 239000000284 extract Substances 0.000 description 14
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 13
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 12
- 238000005406 washing Methods 0.000 description 11
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000012790 confirmation Methods 0.000 description 8
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 description 6
- 102200128633 rs104893843 Human genes 0.000 description 6
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 235000013305 food Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 5
- CURLTUGMZLYLDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon dioxide Chemical compound O=C=O CURLTUGMZLYLDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000006698 induction Effects 0.000 description 4
- 102220580465 Thioredoxin domain-containing protein 11_N13A_mutation Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 230000004913 activation Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000013500 data storage Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000005674 electromagnetic induction Effects 0.000 description 3
- 102220078268 rs140308307 Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 238000000060 site-specific infrared dichroism spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 3
- 241000209094 Oryza Species 0.000 description 2
- 235000007164 Oryza sativa Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 2
- 102220515765 cAMP-dependent protein kinase inhibitor alpha_N10D_mutation Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 229910002092 carbon dioxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000001569 carbon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000002596 correlated effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000006837 decompression Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000003203 everyday effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000007274 generation of a signal involved in cell-cell signaling Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 235000009566 rice Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 230000008054 signal transmission Effects 0.000 description 2
- 241001481833 Coryphaena hippurus Species 0.000 description 1
- 239000008186 active pharmaceutical agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009835 boiling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004422 calculation algorithm Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000470 constituent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001816 cooling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001186 cumulative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001351 cycling effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009795 derivation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005358 geomagnetic field Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007781 pre-processing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004064 recycling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004043 responsiveness Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005236 sound signal Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000024891 symptom Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W12/00—Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
- H04W12/02—Protecting privacy or anonymity, e.g. protecting personally identifiable information [PII]
-
- H04B5/48—
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L12/00—Data switching networks
- H04L12/28—Data switching networks characterised by path configuration, e.g. LAN [Local Area Networks] or WAN [Wide Area Networks]
- H04L12/2803—Home automation networks
- H04L12/2807—Exchanging configuration information on appliance services in a home automation network
- H04L12/2809—Exchanging configuration information on appliance services in a home automation network indicating that an appliance service is present in a home automation network
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L12/00—Data switching networks
- H04L12/28—Data switching networks characterised by path configuration, e.g. LAN [Local Area Networks] or WAN [Wide Area Networks]
- H04L12/2803—Home automation networks
- H04L12/2807—Exchanging configuration information on appliance services in a home automation network
- H04L12/2812—Exchanging configuration information on appliance services in a home automation network describing content present in a home automation network, e.g. audio video content
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L12/00—Data switching networks
- H04L12/28—Data switching networks characterised by path configuration, e.g. LAN [Local Area Networks] or WAN [Wide Area Networks]
- H04L12/40—Bus networks
- H04L12/40006—Architecture of a communication node
- H04L12/40013—Details regarding a bus controller
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N1/00—Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
- H04N1/00127—Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture
- H04N1/00204—Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture with a digital computer or a digital computer system, e.g. an internet server
- H04N1/00244—Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture with a digital computer or a digital computer system, e.g. an internet server with a server, e.g. an internet server
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N1/00—Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
- H04N1/00127—Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture
- H04N1/00281—Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture with a telecommunication apparatus, e.g. a switched network of teleprinters for the distribution of text-based information, a selective call terminal
- H04N1/00283—Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture with a telecommunication apparatus, e.g. a switched network of teleprinters for the distribution of text-based information, a selective call terminal with a television apparatus
- H04N1/00291—Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture with a telecommunication apparatus, e.g. a switched network of teleprinters for the distribution of text-based information, a selective call terminal with a television apparatus with receiver circuitry
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N1/00—Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
- H04N1/00127—Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture
- H04N1/00326—Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture with a data reading, recognizing or recording apparatus, e.g. with a bar-code apparatus
- H04N1/00342—Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture with a data reading, recognizing or recording apparatus, e.g. with a bar-code apparatus with a radio frequency tag transmitter or receiver
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N1/00—Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
- H04N1/00127—Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture
- H04N1/00347—Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus, e.g. for storage, processing or transmission of still picture signals or of information associated with a still picture with another still picture apparatus, e.g. hybrid still picture apparatus
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N1/00—Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
- H04N1/00885—Power supply means, e.g. arrangements for the control of power supply to the apparatus or components thereof
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N1/00—Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
- H04N1/00885—Power supply means, e.g. arrangements for the control of power supply to the apparatus or components thereof
- H04N1/00888—Control thereof
- H04N1/00891—Switching on or off, e.g. for saving power when not in use
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N1/00—Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
- H04N1/00962—Input arrangements for operating instructions or parameters, e.g. updating internal software
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N1/00—Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
- H04N1/21—Intermediate information storage
- H04N1/2104—Intermediate information storage for one or a few pictures
- H04N1/2112—Intermediate information storage for one or a few pictures using still video cameras
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W12/00—Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
- H04W12/50—Secure pairing of devices
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F21/00—Security arrangements for protecting computers, components thereof, programs or data against unauthorised activity
- G06F21/60—Protecting data
- G06F21/62—Protecting access to data via a platform, e.g. using keys or access control rules
- G06F21/6209—Protecting access to data via a platform, e.g. using keys or access control rules to a single file or object, e.g. in a secure envelope, encrypted and accessed using a key, or with access control rules appended to the object itself
-
- H04B5/72—
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L12/00—Data switching networks
- H04L12/28—Data switching networks characterised by path configuration, e.g. LAN [Local Area Networks] or WAN [Wide Area Networks]
- H04L12/2803—Home automation networks
- H04L2012/284—Home automation networks characterised by the type of medium used
- H04L2012/2841—Wireless
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L12/00—Data switching networks
- H04L12/28—Data switching networks characterised by path configuration, e.g. LAN [Local Area Networks] or WAN [Wide Area Networks]
- H04L12/2803—Home automation networks
- H04L2012/2847—Home automation networks characterised by the type of home appliance used
- H04L2012/2849—Audio/video appliances
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L2463/00—Additional details relating to network architectures or network communication protocols for network security covered by H04L63/00
- H04L2463/062—Additional details relating to network architectures or network communication protocols for network security covered by H04L63/00 applying encryption of the keys
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L41/00—Arrangements for maintenance, administration or management of data switching networks, e.g. of packet switching networks
- H04L41/08—Configuration management of networks or network elements
- H04L41/0803—Configuration setting
- H04L41/0813—Configuration setting characterised by the conditions triggering a change of settings
- H04L41/082—Configuration setting characterised by the conditions triggering a change of settings the condition being updates or upgrades of network functionality
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L63/00—Network architectures or network communication protocols for network security
- H04L63/04—Network architectures or network communication protocols for network security for providing a confidential data exchange among entities communicating through data packet networks
- H04L63/0428—Network architectures or network communication protocols for network security for providing a confidential data exchange among entities communicating through data packet networks wherein the data content is protected, e.g. by encrypting or encapsulating the payload
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L63/00—Network architectures or network communication protocols for network security
- H04L63/08—Network architectures or network communication protocols for network security for authentication of entities
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L63/00—Network architectures or network communication protocols for network security
- H04L63/14—Network architectures or network communication protocols for network security for detecting or protecting against malicious traffic
- H04L63/1408—Network architectures or network communication protocols for network security for detecting or protecting against malicious traffic by monitoring network traffic
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N1/00—Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
- H04N1/44—Secrecy systems
- H04N1/4406—Restricting access, e.g. according to user identity
- H04N1/4413—Restricting access, e.g. according to user identity involving the use of passwords, ID codes or the like, e.g. PIN
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N2101/00—Still video cameras
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N2201/00—Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
- H04N2201/0008—Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus
- H04N2201/0034—Details of the connection, e.g. connector, interface
- H04N2201/0037—Topological details of the connection
- H04N2201/0039—Connection via a network
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N2201/00—Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
- H04N2201/0008—Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus
- H04N2201/0034—Details of the connection, e.g. connector, interface
- H04N2201/0048—Type of connection
- H04N2201/0049—By wire, cable or the like
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N2201/00—Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
- H04N2201/0008—Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus
- H04N2201/0034—Details of the connection, e.g. connector, interface
- H04N2201/0048—Type of connection
- H04N2201/0055—By radio
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N2201/00—Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
- H04N2201/0008—Connection or combination of a still picture apparatus with another apparatus
- H04N2201/0034—Details of the connection, e.g. connector, interface
- H04N2201/0048—Type of connection
- H04N2201/006—Using near field communication, e.g. an inductive loop
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N2201/00—Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
- H04N2201/0077—Types of the still picture apparatus
- H04N2201/0084—Digital still camera
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N2201/00—Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
- H04N2201/32—Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
- H04N2201/3201—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
- H04N2201/3212—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to a job, e.g. communication, capture or filing of an image
- H04N2201/3214—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to a job, e.g. communication, capture or filing of an image of a date
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N2201/00—Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
- H04N2201/32—Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
- H04N2201/3201—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
- H04N2201/3212—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to a job, e.g. communication, capture or filing of an image
- H04N2201/3215—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to a job, e.g. communication, capture or filing of an image of a time or duration
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N2201/00—Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
- H04N2201/32—Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
- H04N2201/3201—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
- H04N2201/3212—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to a job, e.g. communication, capture or filing of an image
- H04N2201/3216—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to a job, e.g. communication, capture or filing of an image of a job size, e.g. a number of images, pages or copies, size of file, length of message
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N2201/00—Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
- H04N2201/32—Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
- H04N2201/3201—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
- H04N2201/3212—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to a job, e.g. communication, capture or filing of an image
- H04N2201/3219—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to a job, e.g. communication, capture or filing of an image of a job status, e.g. successful execution
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N2201/00—Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
- H04N2201/32—Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
- H04N2201/3201—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
- H04N2201/3225—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to an image, a page or a document
- H04N2201/3226—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to an image, a page or a document of identification information or the like, e.g. ID code, index, title, part of an image, reduced-size image
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N2201/00—Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
- H04N2201/32—Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
- H04N2201/3201—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
- H04N2201/3225—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to an image, a page or a document
- H04N2201/3232—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to an image, a page or a document of a page, copy or picture number
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N2201/00—Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
- H04N2201/32—Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
- H04N2201/3201—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
- H04N2201/3225—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to an image, a page or a document
- H04N2201/3249—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to an image, a page or a document data relating to a linked page or object, e.g. hyperlink
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N2201/00—Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
- H04N2201/32—Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
- H04N2201/3201—Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
- H04N2201/3278—Transmission
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W12/00—Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
- H04W12/04—Key management, e.g. using generic bootstrapping architecture [GBA]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W12/00—Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
- H04W12/06—Authentication
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W12/00—Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
- H04W12/12—Detection or prevention of fraud
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W8/00—Network data management
- H04W8/005—Discovery of network devices, e.g. terminals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W84/00—Network topologies
- H04W84/18—Self-organising networks, e.g. ad-hoc networks or sensor networks
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a communication apparatus, and more particularly to a communication apparatus that transmits external device information read from an external device by close proximity wireless communication to a server connected via a general-purpose network.
- Photo sharing service is one such service.
- the user uploads a picture taken by the user to the server, and thereafter can access the picture taken by the user at any time by accessing it from a PC or the like via the Internet.
- the digital camera or memory card has a wireless LAN function, and the captured images can be automatically sent to the server directly by a simple procedure in order to facilitate the procedure for uploading the captured images.
- the products to be uploaded to have recently appeared.
- the user operates a TV that can connect to the Internet to access the server, performs login processing such as inputting a user ID and a password, and acquires the image from the server The launch of the TV has begun.
- a display connected to a server has an RF-ID reader, an article has an RF-ID tag, and article ID (UID) information in a non-rewritable memory in the RF-ID.
- the server has a database in which an article ID (UID) and an image such as a user's face picture are linked.
- UID article ID
- the UID is read, the image corresponding to the UID is taken out from the database, and a technique is disclosed in which the owner is known by displaying an image such as a photograph of the user's face on the display device. It is done.
- Patent Document 1 discloses a technique that can easily display image data such as a photograph of the owner of the article by mounting the RF-ID on the display device and the RF-ID on the article. Only the UID is recorded in the ID, and information for simplifying access to the server between the TV terminal and the tag is exchanged, and the procedure of operation is not simplified. Since only the UID is recorded in the RF-ID of the article, there is a problem that when the server to be connected is different depending on the article, image information associated with the ID can not be acquired.
- the TV terminal includes a corresponding application program (a program for downloading an image, etc.) for each individual, type, or application system of an article equipped with RF-ID.
- a corresponding application program a program for downloading an image, etc.
- the TV terminal needs to hold many kinds of application programs, and not only needs a storage device for that, but there is also a problem that maintenance such as program revision becomes complicated.
- the present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a communication apparatus capable of simplifying various settings of an article (external device).
- a communication device is a communication device that transmits external device information received from an external device by close proximity wireless communication to a server via a network
- the antenna unit for performing near-field wireless communication with the external device, the near-field wireless communication unit that communicates with the external device via the antenna unit and receives the external device information, and the near-field wireless communication unit receives
- the server based on an external device storage unit storing external device information, the external device information stored in the external device storage unit, and communication device information including communication device identification information capable of identifying the communication device
- a server communication unit for transmitting the registration information to the server via the network.
- a communication device capable of simplifying various settings of an article (external device). For example, it is particularly effective when the user of the external device completes the user registration of the external device with one touch using a communication device such as a portable terminal.
- the present invention can be realized not only as an apparatus but also as an integrated circuit including processing means included in such an apparatus, or as a method in which the processing means constituting the apparatus are steps. May be implemented as a program that causes a computer to execute, or as information, data, or a signal that indicates the program.
- the programs, information, data and signals may be distributed via a recording medium such as a CD-ROM or a communication medium such as the Internet.
- FIG. 1 is an entire system diagram of a photographing apparatus according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 2A is an external view of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 2B is an external view of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 2C is an external view of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 4 is a composition of a second memory of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 5 is a composition of a second memory of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 6 is a configuration diagram of image display method instruction information of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the photographing device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the photographing device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the photographing device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the photographing device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the photographing device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 20A is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 20B is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 21A is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 21B is a flowchart of the operation of the cover and the TV of the imaging device in Embodiment 1 of the present invention.
- FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a display method of the photographing apparatus and the TV in the first embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 23 is a block diagram of an RF-ID unit of a photographing apparatus storing an operation program, a remote controller attached to the television, and the television.
- FIG. 24 is a flowchart of processing for transferring and executing the operation program stored in the RF-ID.
- FIG. 25 is an example of a description of an operation program for downloading an image and performing a slide show.
- FIG. 26 is a block diagram of a television that changes processing of an operation program according to a language code, and a server that stores the program.
- FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the process of changing the process of the operation program according to the language code.
- FIG. 28 is a block diagram of a home network 6500 in which the photographing device 1 and the TV 45 include a wireless LAN.
- FIG. 29 shows an example of an authentication method not using an RF-ID.
- FIG. 30 shows an example of an authentication method using RF-ID.
- FIG. 29 shows an example of an authentication method not using an RF-ID.
- FIG. 31 shows an example of the authentication method in the case where it is difficult to bring the terminals close to each other.
- FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the camera side operation.
- FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the TV side operation.
- FIG. 34 is a block diagram of a first processing unit and a second memory unit of the photographing device 1 which generates an operation program to be executed by the TV.
- FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the operation of the program generation unit 7005 of the first processing unit.
- FIG. 36 is a flowchart of an example of a program generated by the program generation unit 7005.
- FIG. 37 is a block diagram of a first processing unit and a second memory unit of the imaging device 1 that generates an operation program for displaying the usage status of the imaging device 1.
- FIG. 38 shows a use case in which the program generated by the photographing apparatus 1 is executed by an external device.
- FIG. 39 shows a sequence in the case where the program generated by the photographing device 1 is executed by the remote controller with a display function.
- FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing a camera upload procedure in Embodiment 2 of the present invention.
- FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing a camera upload procedure in Embodiment 2 of the present invention.
- FIG. 40C is a flowchart showing a camera upload procedure in Embodiment 2 of the present invention.
- FIG. 40D is a flowchart showing a camera upload procedure in Embodiment 2 of the present invention.
- FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing a camera upload procedure in Embodiment 2 of the present invention.
- FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing a camera upload procedure in Embodiment 2 of the present invention.
- FIG. 40C is a flowchart showing a camera upload procedure in Em
- FIG. 40E is a flowchart showing a camera upload procedure in Embodiment 2 of the present invention.
- FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the upload procedure of the camera in the second embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the upload procedure of the camera in the first embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the operation procedure of the RF-ID unit of the camera in Embodiment 2 of the present invention.
- FIG. 44 is a block diagram of a TV in a second embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an operation of RF-ID communication between a camera and a TV in Embodiment 2 of the present invention.
- FIG. 46A is a detailed flowchart of FIG. FIG.
- FIG. 46B is a detailed flowchart of FIG.
- FIG. 46C is a detailed flowchart of FIG.
- FIG. 46D is a detailed flowchart of FIG.
- FIG. 47A shows a data format of RF-ID communication between a camera and a TV.
- FIG. 47B shows a data format of RF-ID communication between a camera and a TV.
- FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram of an electronic catalog display system.
- FIG. 49 is a block diagram of an electronic catalog server information input device.
- FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing of the electronic catalog server information input device.
- FIG. 51 is a configuration diagram of RF-ID of the electronic catalog notification card.
- FIG. 52 is a block diagram of a TV displaying an electronic catalog.
- FIG. 53 is a block diagram of an electronic catalog server.
- FIG. 54 is a flowchart of an electronic catalog server process.
- FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing of a TV displaying an electronic catalog.
- FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a screen display of the electronic catalog.
- FIG. 57 shows the data structure of the customer attribute database.
- FIG. 58 shows a data structure of the electronic catalog database.
- FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram of an RF-ID-added post card mailing system.
- FIG. 60 is a block diagram of a TV of the RF-ID-attached post card mailing system.
- FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a screen display of the image selection operation of the RF-ID added post card mailing system.
- FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing of the image server of the RF-ID-added post card mailing system.
- FIG. 63 is a system configuration diagram according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 64A is a diagram illustrating an example of fixed information of mail in the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 64B is a diagram illustrating an example of fixed information of mail in the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 64C is a diagram illustrating an example of fixed information of mail in the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the process for associating the image capturing apparatus with the image server in the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 66 is a flowchart of registration of the photographing device to the relay server in the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of a two-dimensional code-included mail.
- FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the process using the two-dimensional barcode of the imaging device in Embodiment 5 of the present invention.
- FIG. 69 is a flowchart of a television according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the relay server in the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 71 is a schematic view of an image transmitting side according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 72 is a schematic view of an image receiving side according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 73 is an operation flowchart of the image transmission side television in the sixth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of a two-dimensional code-included mail.
- FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the process using the two-dimensional barcode of the imaging device in Embodiment 5 of the present
- FIG. 74 is an operation flowchart of an image receiving television according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 75A is an operation flowchart of an image transmission side television in another example of Embodiment 6 of the present invention.
- FIG. 75B is an operation flowchart of an image transmission side television in another example of Embodiment 6 of the present invention.
- FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing an example of record information of the mail matter memory unit in the sixth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 77 is a block diagram of a recorder of the present invention.
- FIG. 78 is a block diagram of the RF-ID card of the present invention.
- FIG. 79 is a flowchart of a procedure for registering setting information in the server.
- FIG. 80 shows the configuration of setting information registered in the server.
- FIG. 81 shows the configuration of device operation information registered in the RF-ID card.
- FIG. 82 is a flowchart of a procedure for updating recorder setting information with an RF-ID card.
- FIG. 83 is a flowchart of a procedure for acquiring setting information from the server.
- FIG. 84 shows the configuration of device operation information registered in the RF-ID card used by the recorder.
- FIG. 85 shows the configuration of device operation information registered in an RF-ID card used in a car navigation system.
- FIG. 86 is a configuration diagram of an embodiment of the present invention when an RF-ID reader is mounted on a remote control such as a TV.
- FIG. 87 is a flowchart in the same embodiment.
- FIG. 88 is a system block diagram in Embodiment 8 of the present invention.
- FIG. 89 is a conceptual diagram showing a method of managing communication device information and external device information transmitted from a communication device by the server database in Embodiment 8 of the present invention.
- FIG. 90 is a conceptual diagram showing an image of a URI that is access control information to the server 8003 in the access control information generating unit of the communication apparatus of the eighth embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 91 is a network environment diagram of home ID registration.
- FIG. 92 is a block diagram of the home ID registration communication device hardware.
- FIG. 93116 is a functional block diagram of the home ID registration communication device.
- FIG. 94 is a flowchart of home ID registration processing.
- FIG. 95 is a flowchart of home ID acquisition processing.
- FIG. 96 is a sequence diagram of home ID registration processing.
- FIG. 97 is a functional block diagram of the home ID sharing communication device.
- FIG. 98 is a flowchart of home ID sharing reception side processing (use of proximity wireless communication).
- FIG. 99 is a flowchart of home ID sharing / transmission side processing (use of proximity wireless communication).
- FIG. 100 is a sequence diagram of home ID sharing processing (use of proximity wireless communication).
- FIG. 101 is a flowchart of home ID sharing reception side processing (home NW device use).
- FIG. 102 is a flowchart of home ID sharing transmission side processing (home NW device use).
- FIG. 103 is a sequence diagram of home ID sharing processing (use of home NW device).
- FIG. 104 is a block diagram of a device management system according to an eleventh embodiment.
- FIG. 105 is a sequence diagram of a device management system according to the eleventh embodiment.
- FIG. 106 is a conceptual diagram of a device management database configuration in the eleventh embodiment.
- FIG. 107 is a display conceptual diagram of the device management system in the eleventh embodiment.
- FIG. 108 is a functional block diagram of the RF-IDN 10 in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 109 is a functional block diagram of the mobile device N20 in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 110 is a functional block diagram of the registration server N40 in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of network products in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 112 is a block diagram showing an example of a system in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 113 is a sequence diagram for registering the information of the television N10A in the twelfth embodiment in the registration server N40.
- FIG. 114A is a diagram showing an example of configurations of product data and server registration data in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 114B is a diagram showing an example of configurations of product data and server registration data in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 115A is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of product information stored by the product information management unit N45 in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of product information managed by the product information management unit N45 in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 114A is a diagram showing an example of configurations of product data and server registration data in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 114B is a diagram showing an example of configurations of product data and server registration data in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 115A is a diagram showing an example of
- FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example of a process flow at the time of product registration of the RF-IDN 10 in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of a process flow at the time of product registration of the mobile device N20 in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a process flow at the product registration of the registration server N40 in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 119 is a sequence diagram showing an example of controlling power supplies of air conditioner N10J and television N10A in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 120A is a diagram showing an example of configurations of position information data and product control data in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 120B is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of first device control data in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 120C is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of second device control data in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of a product map created by the position information creation unit N48 in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of product information stored in the product information management unit N45 in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of a product map created by the position information creation unit N48 in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 124 is a diagram showing an example of the accuracy identifier in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing an example of a system in the twelfth embodiment.
- FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of the entire system in the thirteenth embodiment.
- FIG. 127 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of products mounted by the RF-IDO 50 in the thirteenth embodiment.
- FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of a 3D map of a building which is building coordinate data extracted from the building coordinate database O104 in the thirteenth embodiment.
- FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of image data of a 3D map of a product created by the program execution unit O65 in the thirteenth embodiment.
- FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an example of a 3D map of a product obtained by combining the image data of FIG. 128 and the image data of FIG.
- FIG. 131 is a diagram showing an example of the accuracy identifier in the thirteenth embodiment.
- FIG. 132 is a diagram illustrating an example of a processing flow of the 3D map in the thirteenth embodiment.
- FIG. 133 is a diagram illustrating an example of a processing flow of a 3D map in the thirteenth embodiment.
- FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific low power wireless communication system using a 3D map according to a thirteenth embodiment.
- FIG. 1 shows a conceptual diagram of the present invention.
- a communication system including the photographing device (camera) 1, a TV (television) 45 and a server 42 is shown.
- the left side shows the situation at the time of shooting
- the right side shows the situation at the time of reproducing the shot image.
- the photographing device 1 is an example (here, a digital camera) of the communication device according to the present invention, and the first power source unit 101, the video processing unit 31, and the first antenna 20 are components related to photographing. And a second memory 52 for storing media identification information 111, photographed image status information 60 and server identification information 48, and an antenna 21 of RF-ID.
- the photographing apparatus 1 includes, as components related to reproduction, a first power supply unit 101, a first memory 174, a power detection unit 172, an activation unit 170, media identification information 111, and photographed image status information 60.
- a second processing unit 95 for storing server specifying information 58, a second processing unit 95, a modulation unit 179, a communication unit 171, a second power supply unit 91, and an antenna 21 of RF-ID.
- the TV 45 is an example of a device in which a reader device is connected by a communication path, and more specifically, is a television receiver used to display image data captured by the imaging device 1. , And an RF-ID reader / writer 46.
- the server 42 is a computer that saves the image data uploaded from the imaging device 1 and downloads the image data to the TV 45, and includes a storage device for holding the data 50.
- the image data converted into photographed data by the video processing unit 31 is wirelessly transmitted to the access point using the first antenna 20 for wireless LAN and WiMAX under the condition that communication is possible. And is recorded as data 50 in the server 42 set in advance via the Internet.
- the first processing unit 35 records the photographed image status information 60 of the photographed image data in the second memory 52 of the RF-ID 47.
- the captured image status information 60 at least one of an image capturing date, an image capturing number, a final image transmitting date, an image transmitting number, a final image capturing date, and an uploaded image or an image not uploaded. , The last shooting number etc. are recorded.
- a URL for specifying the data 50 uploaded to the server 42 is generated.
- the server specifying information 48 for accessing the information image data is recorded in the second memory 52 by the first processing unit 35.
- media identification information 111 for identifying whether the system in which this RF-ID is built in is a camera, a card, a postcard, etc. is also recorded in the second memory 52.
- the second memory 52 operates with the main power supply of the camera when the main power supply (the first power supply unit 101 such as a battery) of the camera is on.
- the power is supplied from the external RF-ID reader / writer to the RF-ID antenna 21 even if the main power supply of the camera is not turned on, so the second power supply unit 91 having no power supply such as a battery adjusts the voltage Then, power is supplied to each block including the second memory of the RF-ID circuit unit, whereby the data of the second memory can be recorded and reproduced, and the data can be transmitted and received.
- the second power supply unit 91 is a circuit that includes a rectifier circuit and the like and generates power from radio waves received by the second antenna 21.
- the second memory 52 can read and write from the second processing unit 95 regardless of whether the main power is on or off, and can read from or read from the first processing unit 35 when the main power is on. That is, the second memory 52 is composed of a non-volatile memory, and can be read and written by both the first processing unit 35 and the second processing unit 95.
- the photographing apparatus 1 When the photographing apparatus 1 is reproduced after the photographing such as travel is finished, the photographing apparatus 1 is brought close to the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 as shown at the time of reproduction on the right side of FIG. Then, power is supplied to the RF-ID 47 via the antenna 21 by the RF-ID reader / writer 46 and the second power supply unit 91 causes the RF power to flow even if the main power supply (the first power supply unit 101) of the photographing apparatus 1 is off. Power is supplied to each part of the ID 47.
- the photographed image status information 60 and the server identification information 58 in the second memory 52 are read by the second processing unit 95 and sent to the TV 45 through the antenna 21.
- the TV side generates a URL based on the server identification information 58, downloads the image data of the data 50 of the server 42, and displays the thumbnail of the image or the like on the display unit 110.
- a message to that effect is displayed on the display unit 110, and in some cases, the imaging device 1 is activated and the server 42 Upload to
- 2A, 2B and 2C show a front view, a rear view and a right side view of the appearance of the photographing device 1 of the present invention.
- an antenna 20 for wireless LAN and an antenna 21 for RF-ID are built in, and an antenna cover 22 made of a radio wave non-shielding material is attached.
- the RF-ID is 13.5 MHz and the wireless LAN is 2.5 GHz, and the number of waves is large and they do not interfere with each other.
- two antennas 20 and 21 are comprised so that it may see from the outside and may overlap.
- the installation area can be reduced, and the effect of reducing the size of the imaging apparatus can be obtained.
- the antenna covers 22 of the two antennas can be combined into one as shown in FIG. 2C, the radio wave non-shielding material can be minimized. Since the radio wave non-shielding material such as plastic has lower strength than metal, minimizing this material has the effect of reducing the reduction in strength of the body.
- FIG. 3 shows a block diagram of the photographing device 1.
- the image data obtained from the imaging unit 30 is sent to the recording / reproducing unit 32 via the video processing unit 31 and recorded in the third memory 33. This data is recorded on the removable IC card 34.
- Image data such as a photographed picture or moving picture is sent to an access point by radio such as a wireless LAN or WiMAZ by the encryption unit 36, the transmission unit 38 of the communication unit 37 and the first antenna 20, and the server 42 via the Internet 40. Sent to That is, image data such as a photo is uploaded.
- the server identification information 48 of the second memory 52 of the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 is read by the RF-ID reader / writer 46 attached to the TV 45 etc.
- the URL of the server 42 is generated using this URL, and the server 45 is accessed from the TV 45 using this URL, and the data 50 such as a file or folder uploaded by the photographing device 1 is accessed, and the image photographed by the photographing device 1 The uploaded image is downloaded and displayed on the TV 45.
- the upload status and the like are recorded in the photographed image status information 55 of the second memory 52 by the recording and reproducing unit 51 of the status data of the photographed image of the first processing unit 35.
- synchronization information 56 indicating whether the image data of the server 42 and the image data captured by the camera coincide or, in other words, whether they are synchronized is recorded.
- the TV 45 reads the photographed image status information 55 in the second memory 52 through the second antenna 21. Therefore, it can be immediately confirmed whether there is a missing image in the data 50 of the server. If there is an unuploaded image, the result is displayed on the display of the TV 45, and the viewer displays "Please upload image" or instructs the camera via the RF-ID antenna 21.
- the photographing apparatus 1 And sends a start signal to the start unit 170 to force the first power supply unit 101 of the photographing apparatus 1 to be activated, and the unuploaded image in the first memory 174 or the like of the photographing apparatus 1 is wireless LAN or wired LAN, Alternatively, it is uploaded to the server 42 via the second antenna 21 for RF-ID.
- the RF-ID antenna 21 When the RF-ID antenna 21 is used, since the amount of transmission is small, if it is attempted to transmit the original image data as it is, it takes a long time for uploading and image display, which makes the user uncomfortable. In order to avoid this, in the present invention, when the antenna 21 is used, a thumbnail image of an unuploaded image is sent. This makes it possible to shorten the apparent uploading time and display time, and to reduce discomfort to the user. Although current RF band RF-IDs often have a transmission rate of several hundreds kbps, quadruple speed is also being considered. In this case, several Mbps may be realized. If thumbnail image data of an unuploaded image is sent, several tens of images can be sent per second. In the case of the list display, there is an effect that all images including the non-uploaded image can be displayed on the TV within a time acceptable to a general user. This method can be said to be a realistic method.
- the wireless LAN, the antenna 21 of RF-ID, and the wired LAN with the fastest and stable route are used to upload and to TV. Display of.
- the communication unit 171 that sends a signal to the second antenna 21 performs communication using a low-speed modulation scheme in a situation where power is externally supplied via the second antenna 21, but power is supplied from the first power unit 101 or the like. In the condition where it can be received, the modulation scheme is switched to a modulation scheme with many signal points such as QPSK, 16QAN, 64QAN, etc. as needed, speeding up transmission and uploading unuploaded image data in a short time.
- the power detection unit 172 detects that there is little available power such as the first power supply or that the external power supply is not connected, the power supply from the first power supply unit 101 is stopped, and the modulation scheme switching unit 175 The modulation scheme is switched to a modulation scheme with a small number of signals or a modulation scheme with a small transmission rate. As a result, it is possible to prevent in advance the capacity decrease of the first power supply unit 101 less than the specified value.
- the second processing unit 95, the communication unit 171, etc. send a power increase request signal to the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 via the second antenna 21 and support To request.
- the RF-ID reader / writer increases the transmission power to a value larger than the specified value of the power at the time of reading the RF-ID. Since the amount of supplied power received via the antenna 21 increases on the RF-ID side, power can be supplied to the communication unit 171 or the first processing unit 35. By this method, the amount of power of the battery 100 of the first power supply unit 101 is not lost. Alternatively, even without the battery 100, the transmission operation can be continued virtually indefinitely.
- the upload image data information 60 of FIG. 3 may be used.
- Information 61 of the uploaded image for example, a picture number or the like is recorded.
- Information 62 obtained by hashing this information may be used. In this case, the amount of information is reduced.
- the TV 45 can read this data and compare it with the information of the image taken by the camera to obtain the information of the unuploaded image.
- the presence identification information 63 of the unuploaded image data can be used. Since the presence identifier 64 indicating whether or not there is unuploaded image data can indicate the presence or absence of the unuploaded image, the information in the second memory 52 can be greatly reduced.
- the number of unuploaded images may be 65.
- the TV 45 since the TV 45 can be read, it is possible to notify the viewer of the number of images required to be uploaded.
- the data volume is recorded as the photographed image status information 55 in addition to the number, the predicted time for uploading the unuploaded image can be displayed on the TV 45 more accurately.
- information 67 obtained by hashing un-uploaded image information may be used.
- the date of the last uploaded image of the server 42 is simply compared with the taken date of the unuploaded image. The presence or absence can be determined.
- the unuploaded image can be checked by comparing it with the last image number of the image uploaded to the server. You can get information on whether there is any.
- information 70 of the photographed image for example, all the image numbers of the photographed image is recorded in the second memory 52. Then, when the server 42 is accessed later, comparison with the image data uploaded to the server 42 makes it possible to determine whether there is unuploaded data. In this case, data can be compressed by using information 71 obtained by hashing the photographed image information.
- a UID 75 of RF-ID, a camera ID unit 76, and media identification information 111 are recorded. These are read from the TV 45 via the second antenna 21 even if the main power supply of the camera (except for the sub power supply such as a clock backup) is turned on, and used for identification of the camera or user and authentication of the device.
- the main power supply of the camera except for the sub power supply such as a clock backup
- the sub power supply such as a clock backup
- the media identification information 111 contains an apparatus including an RF-ID, or an identifier indicating whether the media is a camera, a video, a postcard, a card, a mobile phone, or the like.
- the device and media can be specified by this identifier, so it is possible to display a camera or postcard mark or icon on the screen as shown in FIG. 22 described later, or change the process according to the identification information. it can.
- the image display method instruction information 77 is recorded, for example, when the list display 78 of FIG. 5 is ON, the thumbnails of photographs etc. when the second antenna 21 is brought close to the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 Display a list of image data.
- the image data is displayed on the TV 45 one by one from the new order or from the old order one by one.
- a recording area for server identification information 48 is provided.
- server URL generation information 80 which is original information for generating a server URL
- server address information 81 and user identification information 82 is provided.
- login ID 83 is used.
- Etc. are recorded.
- password 84 is also an area for recording the password 84, and optionally an encrypted password 85 is recorded.
- URL generation unit 90 provided in the inside of the imaging device 1, in the RF-ID 47, in the camera, or on the TV 45 side.
- URL for accessing the image data group to be generated is generated.
- power is supplied by the second power supply unit 91.
- the URL 92 may be created and directly recorded in the second memory 52.
- the data in the second memory 52 can be read from either the second processing unit 95 on the RF-ID side or the first processing unit 35 on the camera side.
- the TV 45 when the TV 45 reads the RF-ID 47 of the camera, it downloads the image data corresponding to this camera in the server 42 for obtaining the upload status information, the server address, the login ID, and the password instantly.
- the TV 45 can be displayed at high speed.
- the power is supplied from the RF-ID reader / writer to the second power supply unit 91, so that the operation is performed. Therefore, the power of the battery 100 of the photographing device 1 is not reduced.
- the first power supply unit 101 receives power supply from the battery 100 and supplies power to each part of the camera. However, in the inactive state, the third power supply unit 102 supplies weak power to the timepiece 103 and the like. In some cases, backup power is supplied to a part of the second memory 52.
- the RF-ID 47 receives power from the second antenna and operates the second power supply unit 91 to operate the second processing unit 95, the data reception unit 105, the recording unit 106, the reproduction unit 107, the data transfer unit 108 (communication unit 171). And the second memory 52 is operated.
- the battery 100 of the camera can be maintained for a long time.
- step 150b When the main power is off at step 150a in FIG. 7, it is checked at step 150b whether the activation setting of the RF-ID reader / writer at the time of main power off is made. If Yes, the RF-ID reader / writer 46 is turned on at step 150c. Then, in step 150e, the power saving mode of the RF-ID reader / writer is entered.
- step 150f If the impedance of the antenna unit is measured or the proximity sensor is measured in step 150f, and if the RF-ID is brought close to the antenna of the RF-ID reader / writer in step 150g, it is detected in step 150g whether proximity or contact is made.
- step 150h output of power to the antenna is started, and at step 150k, the second power supply is turned on, the second processing unit starts operation, and at step 150m, communication is started.
- step 150 Upon reception in step 150, mutual authentication is started in step 151a of FIG. 8, mutual authentication is started in step 151f, and if mutual authentication is OK in steps 151b and 151g, the data in the second memory is read out in step 151d, The data of the second memory is transmitted at 151e, the RF-ID reader / writer receives the data of the second memory at step 151i, and it is checked at step 151j whether the identification information etc. of the second memory is correct. Then, check if there is identification information of automatic power ON on the TV 45 side. If Yes, check if the main power of the TV is OFF at step 151r, and if OFF, turn on the main power of TV at step 152a of FIG.
- step 152d the TV The power signal is switched to the screen display signal of RF-ID, and the format identification information is read at step 152e, the second memory is read according to the format identification information at step 152f, the data format is changed and the corresponding data is read If there is a "password request flag" in the second memory section at 152g, the "ID of TV not requiring password input” in the second memory is read at step 152h, and at step 152i, the ID of the own TV and "password input unnecessary” If the TV IDs do not match, the password is read from the second memory in step 152q, the password encryption is decrypted in step 152v, and the password is transmitted in step 152s.
- Steps 152 q and 152 r , 152s may record a password in a storage device provided in the server 42 as data 50 held by the server 42.
- step 152j a password is obtained, and in step 152k, a password input screen is displayed, and it is checked in step 152m whether the password entered is correct.
- This work may be performed by the server 42. If OK, display based on the information and program of the second memory of RF-ID is performed.
- the camera icon (character) is displayed on the display unit of the TV at step 153b. If so, the icon of the postal postcard is displayed on the display unit in step 153d, and if it is found that the card is an IC card in step 153e, the icon of the IC card is displayed on the display unit in step 153f. If you know, display the icon of the mobile phone on the corner of the TV screen.
- step 154a and 154i of FIG. 11 the service content identification information is read from the server or the second memory, and it is checked whether it is an image display service in step 154c, postcard service such as direct mail in step 154b, or advertisement service in step 154d.
- server identification information 48 is obtained from the second memory in steps 154f and 154j, and if there is no URL 92 in the second memory, processing proceeds to steps 154h and 154k to obtain server address information 81 and user identification information 82, as shown in FIG.
- step 155a, 155p the encrypted password is obtained from the second memory
- the decrypted password is obtained in step 155b
- the URL is generated from the above information in step 155c
- the URL 92 exists in the second memory
- step 155d including The server of the URL is accessed through the unit and the Internet, connection with the server 42 is started in step 155k, the operation program existing identifier 119 is read in step 155q, and the operation program existing identifier is present in step 155e. If there is also an operation program, the operation program selection information 118 is read in step 155r, and if the operation program selection information is set in step 155g, directory information of a specific operation program is selected in step 155h and step 155s.
- Step 155j (TV side or server side) is to check whether the image target service in step 156a of FIG. 13, starts checking operation of the non-uploaded image data in Yes if step 156b.
- step 156i the non-upload data existence identifier 64 is read, and in step 156c, if the non-upload data existence identifier 64 is ON, the number of unuploaded images 66 and the data capacity 65 are read in step 156d.
- the number 66 is displayed, the estimated upload time of the data from the unuploaded data capacity 65 is displayed on the display unit of the TV, and in step 156f, if the camera side is in the automatic image uploadable state, the camera is activated in step 156g. Upload the unuploaded data to the server via the first antenna 20 or the second antenna 21, etc. wirelessly or by wire with contacts, and when complete, proceed to step 157a of FIG. Che If No, the identifier 121 of the image display method instruction information of FIG.
- step 157n is read in step 157n, and it is checked in step 157b whether the image display method identification information is present in the server.
- the directory information 120 on the server in which the information is recorded is read out, the directory information 120 on the server in which the image display method instruction information corresponding to the UID is recorded is read in step 157c, and the image display on the server is displayed in step 157d.
- step 157b If the step 157b is No, the process proceeds to the step 157e, the image display method instruction information is obtained from the camera, and the process proceeds to the step 157f.
- step 157f display is started based on the image display method instruction information, in step 157g, all image display identifier 123 is read, and in step 157g, if all images are displayed, all images are displayed in step 157r. Is displayed at step 157h, and if it is list display identifier 125 at step 157i, display order identifier 122 at step 157t is read and displayed at date order and upload order based on the display order identifier at step 157j, and the slide show is displayed at step 157v.
- step OK is OK
- step 158c it is checked in step 158c whether it is in the display voice server
- step 158s the directory 130 of the voice server is checked
- step 158a it is checked on the server of the display voice Access the directory and output the sound.
- step 158f If the priority display image is not all images at step 158e, a partial image is selected at step 158f, information of the specific directory 124 is obtained at step 158v or step 158w (step 158g), and an image of the specific directory is displayed at step 158h. The entire image may be displayed as in step 158i. When the display is completed in step 158j, "Do you want to view another image" is displayed in step 158k. If the result is Yes, a menu of images in another directory is displayed in step 158m.
- step 159a of FIG. 16 When the image of the specific user is requested in step 159a of FIG. 16, the data of the specific user all image 132 and the password 133 of the specific user are obtained in step 159m, and the password of the specific user is requested in step 159b. If it is correct in step 159c, the directory information 134 of the file containing the image list is read in step 159p, the directory containing the image list of the specific user is accessed in step 159d, and the image from the server specific directory is accessed in step 159r. The data is downloaded, and the image of the specific user is displayed in step 159e.
- the color correction routine is started in step 159f, the camera type information is read out from the camera ID and the camera ID unit 76 in step 159g, and the characteristic data of the camera type is downloaded from the server in steps 159h and 159t.
- step 159i and 159u the TV characteristic data is downloaded.
- step 159w data is calculated to obtain correction data.
- step 159j the color and brightness of the display unit are corrected based on the characteristic data of the camera and the TV, and in step 159k, the display is performed with the correct color and brightness.
- the terminal with which the camera is close at step 160b is a printer or a terminal connected to the printer
- camera model information for each image data at step 160c The printer model name is obtained, the correction data is calculated and corrected from each information of the server in step 160d, the directory information 137 containing the image data to be printed is obtained in step 160p, and the image to be printed is obtained in step 160e
- the server is accessed using the address of the directory in which the data (file name) is recorded, the image data of the specific directory is transmitted in step 160m, the print image data is obtained in step 160f, and printing is performed in step 160g.
- the printing is completed in 160 h.
- an identifier indicating that printing has been completed once is recorded in each image data, and in step 160n, a print completion identifier is assigned to the image data printed on the server.
- step 161a of FIG. 18 the main power supply of the TV is turned on in step 161a of FIG. 18, the UID is read from the second memory in step 161k, the UID is obtained in step 161b, the server specifying information 48 is obtained in step 161m, The directory of the server is accessed at 161c, and at step 161d the last server of the service corresponding to this UID is searched. If there is the final server in step 161e, the final server is accessed in step 161g, the user ID, password and service name are read from the UID list, and if the password is required in step 161h, it is determined in step 161i whether it is correct In step 162a of FIG.
- step 162b it is checked whether the service is a photo or video, and if it is Yes in step 162b, the address of the corresponding program such as billing or the image data to be displayed from the specific directory of the server associated with the UID.
- a list including image file names and image display instruction information, a forced display instruction, a forced print instruction, and a camera ID are read, and display and print operations are automatically performed according to these data and procedures.
- step 162c If necessary, password input is requested, and if it is desired to print a specific image in step 162c, the specific image data to be printed in step 162d is added to the server corresponding to the UID or the print directory of the TV, and step 162e. If a printer is connected to the TV or a single printer is checked, and if Yes, the RF-ID portion of the media such as this postcard is made to approach the RF-ID reader / writer of the printer in step 162f, as shown in FIG. In step 163a, the printer reads the UID of the medium, reads the image data or the location of the image data to be printed from the print directory on the correction server in the figure, causes the image data to be printed, and the printing is completed in step 163b. To finish.
- step 163b In the case of shopping service in step 163b following step 163i following step 23 of FIG. 19, check if authentication is correct in step 163e, and if correct, read out from the server the shopping / billing program associated with the UID in step 163f. , And execute the program, and when the program is completed in step 163g, the process ends.
- step 164a of FIG. 21A the UID and the first URL of the relay server are specified on the surface outside the second RF-ID that is attached to or built into a medium such as a postcard and on which the URL information of the relay server is recorded. Data is printed and displayed in a two-dimensional barcode.
- step 164b there is a camera having a communication function with the main server and waiting for the first RF-ID unit, and there is a camera in which the first URL information of the main server is recorded, and the two-dimensional camera
- the barcode is optically read and converted into data specifying the UID of the second RF-ID and the second URL of the relay server.
- the converted data is recorded in the memory of the camera.
- a specific image group is selected from the images captured by the camera, and is recorded in a specific first directory on the main server.
- the first directory information is uploaded along with the first URL information of the main server to a specific second directory on the relay server of the second URL.
- Information for associating the UID of a specific second RF-ID with the second directory is uploaded to the relay server of the second URL, and a medium such as a postcard is mailed to a specific person at step 164e.
- the person who has received the postcard in step 164f of FIG. 21B brings the RF-ID part of the postcard close to the RF-ID reader part such as a TV to obtain the second URL of the relay server and the UID of the postcard.
- step 164g the relay server of the second URL is accessed, and the first URL and the first directory information of the program in the second directory associated with the UID or the main server in which the specific image data is recorded are extracted. Download image data from the main server and display it on the TV screen.
- the imaging unit of the imaging apparatus according to the present invention reads a two-dimensional barcode recorded with server information, which is generally printed on goods or postcards, and uses the information of the two-dimensional barcode as digital data.
- the TV without the optical sensor for the two-dimensional bar code indirectly reads the data of the two-dimensional bar code Can be accessed automatically.
- FIG. 22A shows a display state when the photographing device 1 is brought close to the RF-ID antenna 138 of the TV 45.
- the camera icon 140 for recognizing that it is a camera is displayed as described above.
- FIG. 22 (b) shows the case where the RF-ID is embedded in the postcard 139. Since the attribute information of the postcard is read by the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45, the postcard icon 141 is displayed in the lower left corner of the TV 45 as shown in the figure, and the server image is displayed as in FIG. And the menu screen is displayed in Tangible.
- the operation program 116 shown in FIG. 4 is transmitted to the TV 45 of FIG. 3 which is a communication target of the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1, and the communication target of the RF-ID unit
- the details of the process for executing the transmitted program will be described.
- FIG. 23 is a block diagram of a process performed by the device to be communicated with the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 to execute the transmitted program.
- a communication system including a part of the photographing apparatus 1 (RF-ID 47, second antenna 21), a TV (television) 45, and a remote control 827 of the TV 45 is shown in the figure.
- the photographing apparatus 1 is a camera having an RF-ID 47 performing near-field wireless communication with an RF-ID reader / writer 46 connected to the TV 45 via an infrared communication channel, and the antenna 21 for near-field wireless communication
- Nonvolatile second memory 52 storing operation program 116 to be executed by TV 45 by reference, UID portion 75 stored in second memory 52 according to the input signal received by data receiving portion 105, and A data transfer unit 108 for transmitting the operation program 116 to the RF-ID reader / writer 46 via the antenna 21; UID unit 75 and the operation program 116 transmitted from the 108, from the data transfer unit 108, via the antenna 21, RF-ID reader-writer 46 and infrared communication path, characterized in that it is transferred to the TV45.
- Each component will be described in detail below.
- the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 has a second memory 52, and the second memory 52 stores an operation program 116 operating on the TV 45 to be communicated with by the RF-ID unit. That is, the operation program 116 is an example of a program executed by the TV 45 with reference to the identification information of the photographing apparatus 1 and, for example, an execution form program such as Java (registered trademark) or Java as described later. (Registered trademark) A script type virtual machine program such as a script.
- the reproduction unit of the RF-ID 47 reads out, together with the operation program 116, data which is information necessary to execute an operation program such as server specific information including a UID and a URL unique to the photographing apparatus 1 from the second memory 52,
- the data is transmitted to the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the remote controller 827 for remote control of the TV 45 via the data transfer unit 108 and the second antenna 21.
- the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the remote controller 827 receives the data and the operation program transmitted from the RF-ID 47 of the photographing device 1, and stores the data and the operation program in the RF-ID storage unit 6001.
- the remote control signal generation unit 6002 of the remote control 827 widely uses the data and operation program transmitted from the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 and stored in the RF-ID storage unit 6001 for communication for remote control at present. Convert to a remote control signal such as infrared method.
- the remote control signal transmission unit 6003 transmits a remote control signal including the operation program generated by the remote control signal generation unit 6002 to the TV 45.
- the remote control signal reception unit 6004 of the TV 45 receives the remote control signal transmitted from the remote control 827, and the program execution unit 6005 is, for example, a virtual machine such as Java (registered trademark), and from the remote control signal via the decoding unit 5504
- the data transmitted from the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 and the operation program are acquired, and the operation program is executed.
- FIG. 24 a process flow of executing an operation of “downloading image data from the image server with reference to identification information of the photographing apparatus 1 (here, UID) and displaying an image in a slide show format as an operation program” Indicates
- the remote control When the remote control is brought close to the photographing apparatus 1, power is first supplied to the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 from the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the remote control via RF-ID communication, and the second memory 52
- the UID 75, the URL 48 of the image server, and the operation program 116 are read out (S6001).
- the read UID, the image server URL, and the operation program are transmitted toward the remote control 827 by the data transfer unit 108 and the second antenna 21 (S6002).
- the operation program is composed of a server connection instruction 6006, a download instruction 6008, a slide show display instruction 6010, a processing setting instruction at download completion 6007, and a download completion instruction 6009.
- the remote controller 827 receives the UID, the image server URL and the operation program transmitted from the photographing device 1 by the RF-ID reader / writer 46 (S6003 and S6004), and when the reception is completed, the UID, the image server URL and the operation program are RF In addition to storing in the ID storage unit 6001 (S6005), the UID, the image server URL, and the operation program are converted into a format that can be transmitted by the infrared method as a remote control signal (S6006).
- the remote control signal transmission unit transmits a remote control signal including the UID, the image server URL, and the operation program ( S6008). That is, the remote control 827 functions as a relay that transfers the UID, the image server URL, and the operation program from the photographing device 1 to the TV 45 by the built-in RF-ID reader / writer 46 in addition to the function as a normal remote control. Do.
- the TV 45 receives the remote control signal transmitted from the remote control 827 (S6009), and the decoding unit acquires the UID, the image server URL, and the operation program included in the remote control signal (S6010).
- the program execution unit 6005 executes the operation program using the UID and the image server URL (S6011 to 6015).
- the operation program first establishes a connection with the image server 42 on the communication network using the image server URL (S6012 and 6006 in FIG. 25).
- image data captured by a specific imaging device using UID which is information unique to the imaging device is selected from the image data 50 stored in the storage device of the image server 42 and downloaded to the television (S6013) , S6014 and 6008 of FIG. 25).
- the UID is used to select image data associated with the imaging device 1 indicated by the UID among the image data held by the image server 42.
- the image is sequentially displayed in a slide show format (S6015 and 6007, 6009, 6010 in FIG. 25).
- Reference numeral 6007 in FIG. 25 denotes an instruction to set processing at the time of image download completion, and in FIG. 25, instruction 6009 is set as processing at the time of image download completion. Further, in the process 6009, a process 6010 for executing slide show display of images is called.
- the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the remote control 827 has a configuration provided by the television. It may be. That is, the RF-ID reader / writer 46 may be incorporated in the TV.
- the communication path connecting the reader device and the device may be a wireless communication path such as infrared light, or may be a wired signal cable.
- the UID is used to select image data corresponding to the photographing apparatus 1 from image data held by the image server 42, but specifies the image server in which the image data is placed. It may be used for example, in a communication system in which a plurality of image servers exist, when the UID is associated with the image server storing the image data of the imaging device indicated by the UID, the image is referred to by the UID.
- the TV 45 that has executed the operation program identifies the image server associated with the UID from the plurality of image servers by referring to the UID. Image data can be downloaded from the image server.
- the identification information for identifying the photographing apparatus 1 is not limited to the UID, and may be the serial number, serial number, MAC (Media Access Control) address, information (IP address etc.) corresponding to the MAC address of the photographing apparatus 1, or If the photographing apparatus 1 has a function as a wireless LAN access point, the SSID (Service Set) (Identifier) may be information corresponding to the SSID. Furthermore, in the second memory 52 described above, the identification information (UID 75) for specifying the photographing apparatus 1 is stored separately from the operation program 116, but may be stored (described) in the operation program 116. Good.
- the remote control signal (that is, the communication path connecting the reader device and the device) has been described as using the infrared method, the present invention is not limited to this.
- a wireless communication method such as Bluetooth may be used.
- a wireless communication method faster than infrared communication it is possible to shorten the time required for transferring an operation program or the like.
- the operation program is not limited to the program of the format shown in FIG. 25, but may be another programming language.
- the program execution environment called Java (registered trademark) VM has high versatility, and the execution of the operation program on various devices becomes easy.
- Java registered trademark
- VM has high versatility, and the execution of the operation program on various devices becomes easy.
- Script if written in a compact programming language that can be stored in a small storage capacity of script format represented by Java (registered trademark) Script, even if the storage capacity of the RF-ID shown in the second memory 52 is small It can be stored inside the RF-ID.
- the operation program is not a source code as shown in FIG. 25 but an execution type program subjected to processing such as compilation. May be
- the TV 45 shown in FIG. 26 includes a language code holding unit 6013.
- the program execution unit 6005 reads the language code from the language code holding unit 6013 when the operation program received as a remote control signal performs processing for connecting to the server 42.
- the server 42 corresponding to the language code download the server program from the server 42, and execute the downloaded server program.
- the server 42 is connected to a program storage unit 6011 including processing corresponding to Japanese, and the server program acquired from the program storage unit 6011 is executed on a television. That is, the operation program stored in the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 as described in FIG. 23 executes only the connection to the server 42 and displays the other images from the server. Use the downloaded server program.
- the server identification information received by the TV 45 as a remote control signal includes two types of server addresses indicating a server 42 corresponding to English and a server address indicating a server 42 corresponding to Japanese, and the television received as a remote control signal
- the operation program it is assumed that an instruction to connect to the server indicated by 6006 in FIG. 25 is described.
- the execution environment of the TV 45 acquires the language code of the TV 45 (S6016), and if the language code is Japanese, the server address of the server provided with the program storage unit 6011 including the processing corresponding to Japanese from the server specific information If the language code is not Japanese, the server address of the server provided with the program storage unit 6011 including the process corresponding to English is selected from the server specification information (S6017, S6019). Next, the server 42 is connected using the selected server address (S6021), and a server program is downloaded from the server 42 (S6022, S6023). The acquired server program is executed in a program execution environment (for example, a virtual machine) of the television (S6024).
- a program execution environment for example, a virtual machine
- the language code may be information indicating the country in which the display device is sold and / or installed, such as a serial number or serial number.
- FIG. 28 shows the case where the photographing apparatus 1 and the TV 45 constitute a home network 6500 using a wireless LAN, Power Line Communication (hereinafter, PLC) or the like.
- PLC Power Line Communication
- the photographing device 1 and the TV 45 possess the direct communication units 6501 and 6502 capable of direct communication through the wireless LAN, the photographing device 1 can transmit an image to the TV 45 without passing through a server on the Internet. . That is, the photographing apparatus 1 itself can also play the role of a server.
- some communication media used in the home network 6500 such as a wireless LAN, have the property that they can be easily intercepted by others. Therefore, in order to perform secure data communication, it is necessary to mutually authenticate and exchange encrypted data.
- the access point is an authentication terminal
- all accessible access points are displayed on the screen of the terminal desired to be authenticated
- the user is allowed to select the access point
- encryption is performed by inputting the WEP key.
- Communication is in progress.
- this process is complicated for general users.
- a wireless LAN is built in a home appliance such as a TV
- many terminals that can be authenticated exist.
- the TV 6503 of the same model is used in the next house, it is extremely difficult for the user to identify the home TV 45 from the information displayed on the screen.
- the authentication process is performed using the RF-ID.
- an authentication program including the MAC address 58 is stored in the second memory 52 of the RF-ID unit 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 as the above-mentioned operation program, and brought close to the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45, Pass the certification program to TV45.
- the authentication program includes an encryption key for authentication and an authentication command together with the MAC address, and the TV 45 that recognizes that the information passed from the RF-ID 47 includes the authentication command performs an authentication process. Communication can not be performed unless the communication unit 171 of the RF-ID 47 is physically close, so it is extremely difficult to intercept in a home. In addition, since information transfer is performed by physically bringing them into close proximity, it is possible to avoid performing authentication that is wrong with other devices in the house such as the TV 6503 and the DVD recorder 6504 in the next house.
- FIG. 29 shows an example of the authentication method in the case where the RF-ID is not used.
- the user inputs the MAC address of a terminal to be authenticated such as a camera or a DVD recorder, and the encryption key 6511 for authentication of each terminal.
- the input TV 45 transmits an appropriate message called challenge 6513 to the terminal having the input MAC address.
- the imaging device 1 Upon receiving the challenge, the imaging device 1 encrypts the challenge message 6513 using the authentication encryption key 6511, and sends it back to the TV 45, which is the terminal that has sent the challenge.
- the TV 45 which has received the reply combines the challenge with the input authentication encryption key 6511. By this, the legitimacy of the authentication encryption key 6511 is confirmed, and the user's mistake or the intervention of a malicious user is prevented.
- the data encryption key 6512 a is encrypted using the authentication encryption key 6511 and transmitted to the photographing apparatus 1. This enables encrypted data communication between the TV 45 and the photographing device 1. Furthermore, the same processing is performed with the DVD recorder 6504 and other devices (6505, 6506), and by having the common data encryption key 6512a, encrypted communication can be performed between all the devices connected to the home network. Become.
- FIG. 30 shows an authentication method in the case of using the RF-ID.
- an authentication program 6521a is created in the photographing apparatus 1, and is passed from the RF-ID 47 of the camera to the RF-ID unit 46 of the TV.
- the authentication program 6521a includes an authentication command, a MAC address of the camera, and an encryption key for authentication of the camera.
- the TV extracts the camera MAC address and the authentication encryption key from the RF-ID, encrypts the data encryption key with the authentication encryption key, and transmits it to the designated MAC address. This transmission is performed using a wireless LAN device.
- the authentication using the RF-ID since it is performed mechanically, no user input error occurs.
- the communication device may be any device that constitutes a home network such as PLC or Ethernet (registered trademark) instead of a wireless LAN.
- the MAC address may be any unique identification information that can identify the communication terminal used in the home network.
- FIG. 31 shows an authentication method using RF-ID in the case where it is difficult to bring the terminals close to each other.
- a terminal such as a refrigerator and a TV
- the authentication program information may be relayed using a device attached to the terminal such as the remote control 6531.
- the RF-ID reader / writer built in the remote control 6531 reads out the RF-ID program built in the refrigerator, stores it in the memory of the remote control 6531, and moves the mobile remote control 6531 by the user.
- the program stored in the memory of the remote control 6531 is transferred to the RF-ID of the TV.
- transfer from the remote control to the TV may be performed using communication means originally incorporated in the remote control itself such as infrared light or ZigBee instead of RF-ID. Any medium that has already established the security of communication may be used.
- FIG. 32 shows a flowchart of the camera (shooting device 1) side operation.
- the camera creates an encryption key for authentication and sets a timer (S6541).
- the own MAC address and the created authentication key and authentication command are written in the RF-ID memory unit (S6542).
- the RF-ID of the camera is brought close to the RF-ID of the TV by the user, it is transferred to the RF-ID of the TV in the RF-ID memory of the camera (S6543). If a response is returned within the timer time initially set (S6544), the encryption key for encrypted data contained in the response is decrypted using the authentication encryption key (S6545). Communication is performed with another device using the data encryption key (S6546).
- FIG. 33 shows a flowchart of the operation on the TV 45 side. It is determined whether the information received from the RF-ID unit includes an authentication command (S6560). If the authentication command is not included, processing according to the received information is executed (S6561). If the authentication command is included, it is determined that the information received from the RF-ID unit is the authentication program, and the data encryption key owned by itself is encrypted using the authentication encryption key present in the authentication program (S6562 ). Further, the encrypted data encryption key is transmitted to the MAC address specified in the authentication program (S6563).
- the imaging apparatus 1 described in FIG. 3 generates or updates a program operable on the TV 45, transmits the program from the data transmission unit 173 to the TV 45, and executes the program on the TV 45. This will be described in detail using FIG.
- FIG. 34 is a block diagram of the first processing unit 35 and the second memory 52 of the photographing apparatus 1 in the present embodiment.
- the first processing unit 35 includes a second memory reading unit 7002, a URL generating unit 7004, and a program generating unit 7005. , Program component storage unit 7006 and program writing unit 7 It consists of 007.
- the second memory read unit 7002 is a unit that reads the information stored in the second memory 52 through the recording / reproducing unit 51.
- the URL generation unit 7004 reads the UID 75, the server identification information 48, the photographed image status information 55, and the image display method instruction information 77 from the second memory 52 via the second memory read unit 7002, and based on these information, the image Generates a URL that is the address of the server 42 being uploaded.
- the UID 75 is identification information for identifying the imaging device 1 and is a unique number for each imaging device.
- the URL generated by the URL generation unit 7004 includes a UID. For example, in the image server 42 for uploading an image, an image file is stored in a unique directory for each UID. Can generate different URL addresses.
- the server identification information 48 is a server name for identifying the server to which the image is uploaded, and the IP address of the server 42 can be determined by using DNS (Domain Name Server), and connection to the server 42 can be made. it can. Thus, the server identification information 48 is also included in the generated URL.
- DNS Domain Name Server
- the image display method instruction information 77 is information that can select a list display 78, a slide show display 79, and the like as options.
- the URL generation unit 7004 determines a URL based on the image display method instruction information 77. That is, by generating a URL indicating whether it is the list display 78 or the slide show display 79, the image server can determine whether to perform the list display or the slide show display based on the URL. .
- the URL generation unit 7004 is an image server for viewing an image from the UID 75, the server identification information 48, the photographed image status information 55, the image display method instruction information 77, etc. stored in the second memory 52.
- the generated URL is output to the program generation unit 7005.
- the program generation unit 7005 is a program that can be operated on the TV 45 by URl generated by the URL generation unit 7004 and the forced display instruction 7000, forced print instruction 136 and format identification information 7001 stored in the second memory 52. It is a part to generate.
- the program generation unit 7005 can also generate a new operation program based on the above-described information as a method of generating a new operation program, or can update a previously generated operation program to obtain a new operation program. It can also be generated.
- the program generated by the program generation unit 7005 is a program operable on the TV 45, and must be compiled into machine language for the system controller so as to be operable on a system controller (not shown) of the TV 45.
- a compiler is provided in the program generation unit 7005, and the generated program is converted into an executable program.
- the URL input to the program generation unit 7005 is a URL for connecting to the image server in which the image is recorded, and the program generation unit 7005 generates or updates a connection program to the server using the URL. .
- the forcible display instruction 7000 is when communication with the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 is possible from the second antenna 21 of the photographing apparatus 1 while watching a program by a normal broadcast wave on the TV 45, for example. Is an option to automatically set the TV 45 to the browser viewing mode for displaying image information from the image server, and a program for forced display on the TV 45 when this option is selected.
- the forced print instruction 136 is when, for example, the second antenna 21 of the photographing apparatus 1 can communicate with the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 while watching a program by a normal broadcast wave on the TV 45, for example.
- the format identification information 7001 is format information for display, and the program generation unit 7005 selects the language code optimum site selection option in the format information, and the language set in the TV 45 is selected.
- the code creates a program to select the URL to connect to the server. For example, when the language code optimum site selection option in the format information is selected, if the language code of the TV 45 is Japanese, select the Japanese site as the URL to be connected, and select the language code. If is not Japanese, generate a program for connecting by selecting an English site as the URL to connect. Therefore, when the language code optimum site selection option in the format information is selected, the URL generation unit 7004 generates two URLs, one for the Japanese site and the other for the English site. This program generation unit 7005 outputs this.
- the program component storage unit 7006 stores program command information for generating a program by the program generation unit 7005.
- the program component stored in the program component storage unit 7006 may be a general library or API.
- the program generation unit 7005 When the program generation unit 7005 generates a connection command to the server, the program generation unit 7005 is described in the URL by connecting the URL generated by the URL generation unit 7004 to “Connect” which is the server connection command from the program component storage unit. Create or update a connection program to connect to the server.
- the program writing unit 7007 is an interface for writing the program generated by the program generation unit 7005 in the second memory unit.
- the program output from the program writing unit 7007 is stored in the program storage unit 7002 of the second memory 52 via the recording / reproducing unit 51.
- the reproduction unit reads the program from the program storage unit 7002 of the second memory 52 and transfers data.
- the unit 108 transmits a transmission signal indicating a program to the RF-ID reader / writer 46 via the second antenna 21.
- the transmitted transmission signal is received by the TV 45 via the RF-ID reader / writer 46.
- the TV 45 executes the received program.
- the serial number 7008 is a serial number of the TV 45, which is information that allows the date, place, manufacturing line, manufacturer, and the like of the TV 45 to be determined.
- the language code 7009 is a language code used for menu display etc. set in the TV 45, and can be switched by the user in addition to being preset.
- the program execution virtual machine 7010 is a virtual machine for executing a program to be received, and is effective both when configured by hardware and configured by software.
- the program execution virtual machine is configured of a JAVA (registered trademark) virtual machine.
- the JAVA (registered trademark) virtual machine is a stacked or interpreted virtual machine that executes a defined instruction set. By mounting this virtual machine, the program generated by the program generation unit 7005 of the photographing apparatus 1 does not have to select its execution platform, and can generate an executable program on any platform.
- FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the operation of the program generation unit 7005 of the photographing device 1.
- the program generation unit 7005 initializes generated program information (S7000).
- a connection command to the server 42 is generated using the URL generated by the URL generation unit 7004.
- an instruction set for example, “Connect” in the figure
- a server connection program for example, “ Generate Connect (URL) ”.
- the forced display instruction 7000 in the second memory 52 is confirmed, and it is determined whether the forced display instruction is ON (S7001). If it is ON, an instruction set for a forced display program is called from the program component storage unit 7006, and a forced display command is generated (S7002). The generated command is added to the program (S7004).
- the image display method instruction information 77 in the second memory 52 is checked to determine whether the list display 78 is set to ON (S7008). If it is ON, a list display command for displaying a list of image files stored in the server is generated (S7009). The generated command is added to the program (S7010).
- the image display method instruction information 77 in the second memory 52 is checked to determine whether the slide show 79 is set to ON (S7011). If it is ON, a slide show command for displaying the image file stored in the server as a slide show is generated (S7012). The generated command is added to the program (S7013).
- the program generation unit 7005 of the photographing device 1 uses the command generation set for program generation stored in the program component storage unit 7006 based on the contents set in the second memory 52. , A program for displaying an image on the TV 45 is generated.
- the present invention is not limited to this.
- a forced display instruction command is generated as a program to be generated
- a display device and a program for determining whether there is a display function are inserted in the device that executes the program, and only if there is a display device and a display function If executed, it is possible to create a program that eliminates confusion on the device side that executes the program.
- Insert a command that determines whether the device that executes the forced print command has a print function or a device with a print function is inserted, and execute the forced print command only when it has the command. It is better to
- FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing of a program generated by the program generation unit 7005.
- the present program is transmitted and received via the second antenna 21 of the present photographing apparatus 1 and the present photographing apparatus 1 Are programs executed by different devices.
- the device different from the photographing apparatus 1 is the TV 45, and the program received by the RF-ID reader / writer 46 is executed by a controller (or a virtual machine) (not shown) of the TV 45.
- the program first reads the language code set in the TV 45 as unique information of the TV 45 (S7020).
- the language code is a language code used when displaying the menu of the TV 45, etc., and is set by the user.
- the language set in the language code is determined.
- the language code is Japanese (S7021). If it is determined that the language code is Japanese, the connection command for the Japanese site is selected from the connection commands to the server in the program (S7022). On the other hand, if it is determined that the language code is not Japanese, a connection command to the English site in this program is selected (S7023).
- S7021 Japanese
- the language code is determined as to whether it is Japanese, and a mode for selecting whether to connect to the Japanese site or to connect to the English site is described. However, two or more types of language codes are used.
- connection programs corresponding to respective language codes are provided so as to be compatible with the above, it is possible to correspond to two or more types of language codes, and user convenience can be improved.
- connection is made to the URL described in the connection command (S7024).
- connection to the URL described in the connection command is successful (S7025). If the connection fails, a warning display indicating that the connection failed is displayed on the display unit of the TV 45 (S7027). On the other hand, if the connection is successful, a command for displaying the image file stored in the server as a slide show is executed to display the image file stored in the server as a slide show (S7026).
- the operation program is a program for displaying a slide show
- the operation program according to the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a program that displays a list, forced display, or forced printing.
- a step for automatically changing the setting for displaying the image file stored in the server is inserted as a command.
- the user can display the image file from the image server without the trouble of manually changing the setting of the TV 45.
- a command to switch the setting of the TV 45 automatically to a printable mode is inserted.
- the forced print command is executed by an apparatus without a print function by inserting a judgment command of whether the print function is provided and a judgment command of whether the display function is provided, respectively.
- the operation program according to the present invention may be a connection program for guiding another program.
- it may be a loader program for loading and executing another program, such as a boot loader.
- the feature of the invention disclosed in the present embodiment is the first processing unit of the photographing apparatus 1 which is an apparatus having the RF-ID communication unit (the data transfer unit 108, the second antenna 21, etc.)
- a program generation unit 7005 is included in 35.
- the program generated or updated by the program generation unit 7005 is characterized in that it is executed by an apparatus other than the photographing apparatus 1 of the present embodiment, which is a communication apparatus having an RF-ID.
- the device on which the RF-ID is mounted transfers the ID information (tag information) of its own from the RF-ID communication unit to another device (for example, the TV 45 of this embodiment), and in the other device, the ID information According to (tag information), it is necessary to prepare a unique operation program in other devices with each device having an RF-ID. Therefore, when a new product having an RF-ID appears, it has to obtain, install and execute an operation program corresponding to the new product, or eliminate it as a crisis that can not be dealt with. Also, the installation of the operation program requires specialized knowledge, and it is not easy for anyone to do. Therefore, if a device having an RF-ID is sent out to a large number of people, other devices such as the TV 45 of this embodiment become obsolete, and there is a problem that the property value of the user is lost.
- the device having the RF-ID has the program generation unit 7005, and other devices such as the TV 45 do not use ID information (tag information), Send a program
- other devices such as the TV 45
- ID information tag information
- Send a program In other devices such as the TV 45, by executing the received program, there is no need to prepare an operation program corresponding to each device having an RF-ID in advance, for example, when a device having a new RF-ID appears Also in this case, there is no need to install a new program, and user convenience can be significantly improved.
- a terminal such as a TV it is not necessary for a terminal such as a TV to have a corresponding application program for each individual, type, or application system of an article equipped with an RF-ID. Therefore, a terminal such as a TV need not have a storage device for holding many types of application programs, and maintenance such as revision of the program held by the terminal is also unnecessary.
- a program generated by the program generation unit 7005 a program that does not select an execution platform such as JAVA (registered trademark) language is useful. Therefore, the program of any device can be executed only by preparing a JAVA (registered trademark) virtual machine for the device such as the TV 45 that executes the program.
- JAVA registered trademark
- the program generation unit 7005 of the present invention may have a function of updating a program stored in advance in the program storage unit 7003 of the second memory 52. Even when the program is updated, it has the same effect as generating the program. Further, the program generated or updated by the program generation unit 7005 may be generation or update of data used when executing the program on the TV 45. Normally, a program has associated initialization data and the like, and switches the mode operated by the data or sets a flag, so that the program is generated or updated even when data is generated or updated. It is similar and is a category of the present invention. This is because it is a matter of design whether to hold and read the parameters for mode switching and the like as data or execute the program embedded inside the program when executing the program.
- the program generated or updated by the program generation unit 7005 can also simultaneously generate data such as a parameter string used by the program.
- the parameters to be generated are data generated based on the forced display instruction 7000, the forced print instruction 136, the image display method instruction information 77 or the format identification information 7001 stored in the second memory 52.
- the first processing unit 35 has a usage status detection unit that detects a failure related to the operation or detects a power usage status as the main imaging device 1 which is a communication device having an RF-ID.
- a program for causing the TV 45, which is an apparatus different from the main photographing apparatus, to display the detected use situation is generated.
- FIG. 37 is a block diagram showing a characteristic configuration of the second memory 52 and the first processing unit 35 of the photographing device 1 of the present invention.
- the second memory 52 has a UID 75, server identification information 48, a camera ID unit 135, and a program storage unit 7002.
- the UID 75 is a serial number which is different for each device that can identify the photographing apparatus 1.
- the server specifying information 48 is information for specifying the server, which transmits the image data photographed from the communication unit 37 of the photographing apparatus 1 to the server 42, and includes a server address, a storage directory, a login account, a login password, and the like. .
- the camera ID section 135 records the serial number, date of manufacture, manufacturer, manufacturing line information, manufacturing location, etc. of the photographing device 1 and also includes camera model information for specifying the type of the photographing device 1. It is.
- the first processing unit 35 includes a second memory read unit 7002, a usage status detection unit 7020, a program generation unit 7005, a program component storage unit 7006, and a program writing unit 7005.
- the second memory reading unit is a unit that reads the content stored in the second memory 52 via the recording and reproducing unit 51.
- the UID 75, the server identification information 48, and the camera ID unit 135 are read from the second memory 52 and output to the program generation unit 7005.
- the second memory read unit 7002 reads the contents from the second memory 52 when a read signal from the use status detection unit 7020 described later is output.
- the use condition detection unit 7020 is a part that detects the use condition of each functional unit constituting the main photographing device 1.
- a sensing unit is provided for confirming an operation failure for each of the functional units constituting the imaging apparatus 1, and the sensing result in the sensing unit of each functional unit is input to the actual use condition detection unit 7020.
- the first power supply unit 101 determines whether a defect is recognized in the data processing of the image data captured by the imaging unit 30 (whether it is functioning or does not respond correctly to the call from the usage detection unit).
- the battery voltage level and total power consumption are input from the communication unit 37. Connection with the server is successful or communication with the Internet is possible (whether or not this function is used. Properly respond to the call from the situation detection unit), the display unit 6a correctly responds to the call whether there is a defect in the display processing Dolphin, functioning and whether such failure for each functional unit information and battery life, power consumption is input.
- the usage condition detection unit 7020 determines whether there is a defect to the functional operation for each functional unit in the internal defect detection unit 7021. If the failure is recognized, information for specifying the failure location and information for specifying the content of the failure are output to the program generation unit 7005. Further, the usage condition detection unit 7020 internally has a usage power detection unit 7022, generates usage power information based on total usage power information from the power supply unit, and outputs the usage power information to the program generation unit 7005.
- the program generation unit 7005 generates a program for displaying, on the TV 45, the information specifying the content of the defect from the usage condition detection unit 7020 and the used power information.
- a set of instructions for configuring a program is stored in advance in the program component storage unit 7006, so a display command ("display" in FIG. 37) for displaying a defect or power consumption and a defect point And a program for displaying information for specifying the content of the problem.
- the aforementioned power consumption may be converted into a carbon dioxide emission, and may be generated as a program for displaying the carbon dioxide emission.
- the program generated by the program generation unit 7005 is stored in the program storage unit 7002 of the second memory 52 via the program writing unit 7007.
- the program stored in the program storage unit 7002 of the second memory 52 is transmitted from the second antenna 21 to the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 via the data transfer unit 108.
- the received program is executed by the program execution virtual machine 7010.
- the program generation unit 7005 in the first processing unit 35 causes the TV 45 to display a defect detected by the use condition detection unit 7020 in use of the photographing apparatus 1 and use condition information. It is generated and transmitted to the TV 45, and the TV 45 displays the defect information and the use status information of the photographing apparatus 1.
- the TV 45 can display the defect information and the usage status information to the user without installing a plurality of programs depending on the device such as the photographing apparatus 1.
- a display function such as a simple liquid crystal display is provided in the TV 45 for each device such as a photographing device, a video camera, an electric toothbrush, a weight scale, and defect information and usage status information are displayed on the display function.
- a display function with low display capability can be installed, and only defect information can be displayed as a symbol string or an error code. Therefore, when the defect information and the like are output, the user needs to unlink the instruction manual to determine what kind of error it is.
- a defect report display program executable on the TV 45 which is a device having a high display ability different from the main photographing device for displaying the defect information detected for each device such as the photographing device 1 is generated. It is possible to solve the above-mentioned problems.
- FIG. 38 shows how a program generated by the photographing apparatus 1 is executed by a plurality of devices in the present embodiment, and is performed by the photographing apparatus 1, the TV 45, the remote controller with display function 6520, and the remote controller without display function 6530. Configured
- the TV 45 comprises the RF-ID reader / writer 46 and a wireless communication device 6512.
- the wireless communication device 6512 is, for example, a general infrared communication device currently used for remote control of many home appliances, or a short distance wireless communication apparatus for home appliances using radio waves called Bluetooth (Bluetooth) or ZigBee (ZigBee) Etc.
- the remote controller with display function 6520 includes a transmission unit 6521 for transmitting a signal to the wireless communication device 6512 of the TV 45, a display device 6523 for displaying an image, an input device 6524 for receiving key input from a user, and an RF-ID 47.
- An RF-ID reader 6522 for communicating with the memory, a memory 6526 for storing a program received by the RF-ID reader 6522, and a program execution virtual machine which is a virtual machine for executing a program received by the RF-ID reader 6522 It consists of 6525.
- a recent mobile phone is an example of a remote controller with a display function that holds an infrared communication function, Bluetooth, an RF-ID reader, a liquid crystal screen, a key input unit, a JAVA (registered trademark) virtual machine, and the like.
- the display device 6523 and the input device 6524 may be a liquid crystal screen and a plurality of character input buttons, or may be integrated like a touch panel liquid crystal.
- the remote controller 6530 with no display function is a transmitter 6521 for transmitting a signal to the wireless communication device 6512 of the TV 45, an input device 6533 such as a button that receives an input from the user, and an RF-ID for communicating with the RF-ID 47. It comprises an ID reader 6532 and a memory 6535 for temporarily storing data received from the RF-ID reader 6532.
- the remote controller without display function 6530 may be a general remote controller currently attached to many TVs, or a device having an RF-ID reader built therein.
- the program generated by the photographing device 1 is directly transmitted to the TV 45 via the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45, and the first case for executing the program by the TV 45, the program generated by the photographing device 1
- the third case of transmitting to the TV 45 and executing the program by the TV 45, and the fourth case of transmitting the program generated by the photographing apparatus 1 to the remote controller with display function 6520 and executing the program by the remote controller with display function 6520 are considered.
- the user selectively executes four cases.
- the second case is a case where a program generated by the photographing device 1 is executed on the TV 45 via a remote controller without a display function 6530 without a graphical display device such as a liquid crystal panel, like a general TV remote control. .
- the RF-ID reader 6322 reads the program generated by the photographing device 1 and holds it in the memory 6535.
- the transmission unit 6531 transmits the program held in the memory 6535 to the wireless communication device 6512 of the TV 45, and the program is executed by the program execution virtual machine 7010 on the TV 45 Be done.
- the wireless communication device 6512 is an infrared communication device having directivity
- the wireless communication device 6512 is a short distance wireless communication device such as Bluetooth or ZigBee having no directivity
- the program is transmitted to the TV 45 paired in advance.
- the remote controller without display function 6530 has a display device for notifying the user that the data read by the RF-ID reader 6532 is held in the memory 6535.
- the component has an LED 6534 as its component. From when the program is read into the memory 6535, the LED 6534 may be turned on, and when the user presses the input device 6533 and the program transmission to the TV 45 is completed, the LED 6534 may be turned off. This makes it possible to clearly notify the user that the remote controller with no display function holds the program.
- the LED 6534 may be a single LED or may be integrated with the input device 6533.
- the remote controller with display function 6520 has a program execution virtual machine, such as a high-performance mobile phone called a smart phone
- the program generated by the photographing apparatus 1 is displayed with a display function
- the execution on the remote control and the execution of the program on the TV 45 by transmitting the program to the TV 45 are also examples of cases where the user can select.
- the RF-ID reader 6522 When the user brings the RF-ID 47 close to the RF-ID reader 6522, the RF-ID reader 6522 reads the program generated by the photographing device 1 and holds it in the memory 6535.
- the program read by the RF-ID reader 6522 is transferred to the program execution virtual machine 6525 and executed (S6601).
- the remote control 6520 determines whether the remote control 6520 has a display device (S6602). If the remote control 6520 does not have a display function (N in S6602), the transmission unit 6521 is used to transmit the program to the TV 45, and the process is ended. In this case, the program is executed on the TV 45.
- the remote control has a display function (Y in S6602)
- the continuation of the program is executed using the display device 6523 of the remote control 6520.
- remote control 6520 and TV 45 are paired (Y in S6603)
- a dialog message “Do you want to display on TV? Do you want remote control to be displayed?”
- display device 6523 to prompt the user to make a selection. It displays (S6604).
- the user input from the input device 6524 is received (S6605), and it is determined whether the user has selected display on the TV (S6606). If the user selects to display on the TV 45 (Y in S6606), the program is transmitted to the TV 45 using the transmission unit 6521, and the process ends. In this case, the program is executed on the TV 45. If the user selects to display with the remote control (N in S6606), the continuation of the program is executed using the display device 6523 of the remote control 6520 (S6607).
- the continuation of the program described above refers to the battery status, fault status, display of instruction manual, etc. of the photographing apparatus 1 described above, and it is natural that the invention is not limited to the present embodiment. .
- the program generated by the photographing apparatus 1 is transmitted to the remote control device with display function, determines the capability of the remote control with display function, and which device is to execute the continuation of the program on the remote control Is determined.
- the present invention is not limited to these.
- the program may make any determination according to the capability that the device can have, such as communication capability, audio / video reproduction capability, input device, output device, and so on.
- the remote controller without display function 6530 transmits information to the TV 45 each time one RF-ID (here, the photographing device 1) is read, but two or more remote controllers are used. After reading the RF-ID, the read data may be sent to the TV 45 in a batch.
- the information of each of the heart rate meter with RF-ID and the pedometer with RF-ID is sequentially acquired by the remote control, and then information is collectively transmitted to the TV 45, and the walking history and heart rate It is possible to display the history as one graph on the TV 45.
- the selection of the program to be executed by the TV 45 may be a program of the device read last, or the user may select it. Also good. Also, the function to be executed by the program may be selected. Similarly, in the remote controller with display function 6520, after reading two or more RF-IDs, using the display device on the remote controller 6520, information read out from a plurality of RF-IDs is displayed collectively Needless to say that it is good.
- the storage area of the RF-ID holds not only data but a program that describes the operation of the device, the change of the program that was conventionally required to change the operation of the device This makes it much easier to update, and it is possible to cope with the addition of many new functions and the increase of linked devices.
- proximity communication using RF-ID is an operation that is easy for the user to approach, it is possible to simplify the operation of the device that was troublesome by operating the button and menu in the past, and the operation of the complex device Can be made easy to use.
- FIGS. 40A to 40E show flowcharts of a series of procedures in which a camera (shooting device 1) uploads a photo.
- a camera shooting device 1 uploads a photo.
- the communication unit determines whether connection to the Internet is possible (step S5104). If the connection is possible, URL creation processing is performed (step S5105). Details of this process will be described later.
- the camera uploads the captured image (step S5106), and when the upload is completed, the communication unit is disconnected (step S5107), and the process ends. Details of the upload process will be described later.
- the update process of the second memory information in step S5103 is used to share the identification information of the photograph uploaded to the server 42 and the photograph not uploaded yet between the server 42 and the camera.
- the operation of the upload process S5105 includes, for example, the operations of case 1 to case 4.
- step S5111 There is a method of recording the time 68 taken at the end of the second memory and updating the time 68 taken at the end of the second memory after storing the taken image in the third memory (step S5111).
- Step S5121 The same effect can also be obtained by a method in which the presence identifier 64 of the image data not uploaded to the server 42 is generated corresponding to the photographed image corresponding to the photographed image and stored in the second memory.
- information 67 obtained by hashing the unuploaded image information may be stored in the second memory (step S5131). This reduces the amount of information stored in the second memory, which leads to saving of memory.
- the image number may be generated chronologically in the captured image, and the final number 69 of the image in the second memory may be updated (step S5141). This makes it possible to synchronize on the uploaded photos between the server 42 and the camera even if the camera time is not accurate.
- FIG. 41 shows the details of the URL creation process of step S5105.
- the camera reads the server identification information 48 including the server address information 81, the login ID 83, the password 84 and the like from the second memory (step S5201), and generates a URL (step S5202).
- FIG. 42 shows the details of the upload process of step S5106.
- Each case corresponds to the update process of the second memory information shown in FIGS. 40A to 40E.
- step S5211 when the camera receives the final uploading time to the server 42 from the server 42 (step S5211), the camera compares the final uploading time with the time of the last shooting (step S52112). If the time of the last shooting is greater than the last upload time, that is, there is an image shot after the last upload, the image shot after the last upload time from the server 42 is uploaded to the server 42 (step S5213).
- the camera confirms the unuploaded image data existence identifier 64 from the second memory (step S5231), and confirms the presence of the unuploaded data (step S5232). If there is an unuploaded image, the unuploaded image is uploaded to the server 42 (step S5233), and the information 67 of the uploaded image in the second memory is updated (step S5234).
- the camera first confirms the information 67 obtained by hashing the unuploaded image information from the second memory (step S5301), and is the information 67 obtained by hashing the unuploaded image information from the second memory the same as the information obtained by hashing NULL? It is determined whether or not it is (step S5302). If not identical, it is determined that there is an image not uploaded to the server 42, and the image stored in the third memory and not uploaded to the server 42 is uploaded (step S5303).
- the camera receives the number of the final upload image from the server 42 (step S5311). Next, it is judged whether or not it is the same as the final number 69 of the image in the second memory (step S5312), and if not the same, image data having a unique ID newer than the unique ID from the server 42 is uploaded (step S5313).
- FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a process of performing RF-ID proximity communication between the photographing device 1 and the TV 45.
- the second antenna 21 built in the photographing apparatus 1 receives weak wireless power by polling from the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45, and activates the RF-ID 47 operated by the second power supply unit 91. (S5401).
- the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 that has been activated by receiving the weak power in step S5401 responds to the polling of the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 (step S5402).
- step S5402 After the polling response is made in step S5402, authentication as to whether or not the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 and the RF-ID reader / writer unit of the TV 45 are mutually legitimate devices, and secure information communication between the photographing apparatus 1 and the TV 45 Mutual authentication including key sharing operation of the encryption key for performing (step S5403).
- This mutual authentication is a mutual authentication process using a public key encryption algorithm such as elliptic key cryptography, and is generally the same method as a mutual authentication process of communication by HDMI or IEEE 1394.
- step S5403 the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 and the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 perform mutual authentication processing to generate a common encryption key, and then the second memory 52 readable from the RF-ID 47
- the server URL generation information 80 is read out from the stored server identification information 58, and is transmitted from the second antenna 21 to the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45.
- the server URL generation information 80 includes server address information 81 indicating address information of the server 42, user identification information 82 which is a login ID 83 for the server 42, and a password 84 which is a login password for the server 42.
- the password 84 is important information to prevent a fraudulent third party from tampering, so it may be stored as a pre-encrypted encrypted password 85 and transmitted to the TV 45.
- the photographed image status information 55 stored in the second memory 52 is the second similar to the server specification information 58.
- the antenna 21 transmits the signal to the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 (step S5405).
- the photographed image status information 55 the last photographing time 68 (Case 1), the existence identifier 64 (Case 2) capable of judging whether it is the non-uploaded data added for each photographed image as the presence identification information of the unuploaded image data.
- Information 67 (Case 3) obtained by hashing the unuploaded image information or the final number 69 (Case 4) of the image of the image number temporally assigned to the photographed image is transmitted. This is information necessary to confirm synchronization of the photographed images of the photographing device 1 and the server 42.
- the final shooting time 68 is applied as the shot image status information 55. Therefore, if the final shooting time 68 is temporally slower than the final uploading time to the server 42 by comparing the final uploading time to the server 42 and the final shooting time 68 on the TV 45, the photographing apparatus 1 and the server 42 As the image information to be held is not synchronized, caution information indicating that the synchronization is not achieved is displayed on the display unit of the TV 45.
- the presence identifier 64 capable of determining whether the data is non-uploaded data attached to each captured image is applied as the captured image status information 55. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the unuploaded image exists by checking the presence identifier 64 capable of determining whether it is the non-uploaded data added to each captured image on the TV 45, so that the photographing device 1 and the server 42 can As the image information to be held is not synchronized, caution information indicating that the synchronization is not achieved is displayed on the display unit of the TV 45.
- the final number 69 of the image of the image number temporally assigned to the captured image is applied as the captured image status information 55. Therefore, on the TV 45, the final image number uploaded from the server 42 to the server 42 and the final number 69 of the image of the image number temporally assigned to the photographed image transmitted from the photographing apparatus 1 are confirmed. Thus, it is possible to determine that there is an unuploaded image, and it is assumed that the image information held by the photographing apparatus 1 and the server 42 is not synchronized, and the display unit of the TV 45 indicates that the synchronization is not achieved. indicate.
- the second memory 52 transmits the image display method instruction information 77 to the photographed image. Similar to the situation information 55, the second antenna 21 of the photographing device 1 transmits the signal to the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 (step S5406).
- the image display method instruction information 77 is identification information indicating how to display the images downloaded from the server 42 on the display unit of the TV 45, and a list display showing the image list display (instruction And a slide show (designator) 79 for displaying in a slide show format.
- the generated information 80, the photographed image status information 55, and the image display method instruction information 77 are transmitted.
- the server 42 that transmits from the first antenna 20 of the photographing apparatus 1 and the server that downloads the image from the TV 45 become a common server and directory. It becomes possible to display the image taken and uploaded in 1 on the TV 45.
- the TV 45 by transmitting the photographed image status information 55 to the TV 45, it is possible to determine whether the synchronization of the photographed image recorded in the third memory 33 of the photographing device 1 and the image uploaded to the server 42 by the first antenna 20 is possible. As a result, the TV 45 can determine that the synchronization is not achieved, and by displaying the caution information on the TV 45 indicating that the synchronization is not achieved, it is possible to prevent unnecessary confusion of the user.
- the user can browse the image by the set browsing method by bringing the photographing apparatus 1 closer to the TV 45 without the user specifying the image browsing method on the TV 45. It becomes possible to automatically display an image by the set viewing method without performing a complicated operation by the remote control of the TV 45 or the like.
- FIG. 44 is a block diagram showing the characteristic functions of the TV system according to the present invention.
- the TV 45 includes an RF-ID reader / writer 46, a decoding unit 5504, a URL generation unit 5505, a communication unit 5506, a transmission unit 5507, a communication interface 5508, a reception unit 5509, a data processing unit 5510, a memory unit 5511, a display unit 5512 and a CPU 5513. It consists of
- the RF-ID reader / writer 46 communicates with the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 via the second antenna 21 and includes a wireless antenna 5501, a receiving unit 5503, and a communicable device searching unit (polling unit) 5502. Be done.
- the wireless antenna 5501 is a part that performs close proximity wireless communication with the second antenna 21 of the imaging device 1, and has the same configuration as the wireless antenna of a general-purpose RF-ID reader / writer.
- the communicable device search unit (polling unit) 5502 is a unit that performs polling to check with the other party one by one whether there is a transmission (or processing) request for the RF-ID units of a plurality of cameras.
- polling response from the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 to the polling mutual authentication operation is performed, and the TV 45 and the photographing apparatus 1 share a common encryption key.
- the reception unit 5503 receives the polling response to the polling, and when the mutual authentication is completed, the server URL generation information 80 stored in the second memory 52 of the imaging device 1 from the second antenna 21 of the imaging device 1, The photographed image status information 55 and the image display method instruction information 77 are respectively received.
- the decryption unit 5504 is a portion that decrypts the server URL generation information 80, the captured image status information 55, and the image display method instruction information 77 received by the reception unit 5503. Decryption is performed by using the encryption key shared between the photographing apparatus 1 and the TV 45 after mutual authentication by the communicable device search unit (polling unit) 5502 and using the server URL generation information 80, the photographed image status information 55, and the image encrypted.
- the display method instruction information 77 is decoded.
- the URL generation unit 5505 generates a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) for accessing the server 42 from the server URL generation information 80 and transmits it to the communication unit.
- the URL includes a login ID 83 for logging in to the server and a password 85 in addition to the server identification information.
- the communication unit 5506 is a part that communicates with the server 42 via the general-purpose network by the communication interface 5508.
- the transmission unit 5507 transmits the URL generated by the URL generation unit 5505 via the communication interface 5508, and connects with the server 42.
- the communication interface 5508 is a communication interface connected to the server 42 via a general-purpose network, and is configured by a wired / wireless LAN (Local Area Network) interface or the like.
- the receiving unit 5509 is a part that receives and downloads image information and an image display style sheet (CSS) from the server 42 connected by the communication interface 5508.
- CSS image display style sheet
- a data processing unit 5510 is a part that performs data processing of the image information downloaded by the receiving unit 5509, and performs decompression when the image to be downloaded is compressed, and decryption when the image is encrypted. , Arrange the downloaded image information in the image display style based on the image display style sheet. Further, the main data processing unit 5510 uses the photographed image status information 55 obtained by decoding by the decoding unit according to necessity to the photographed image information stored in the photographing apparatus 1 and the image information uploaded to the server 42. If synchronization is not confirmed, the display unit 5512 displays caution information indicating that synchronization has not been achieved, and performs processing to prevent unnecessary confusion of the user.
- the data processing unit 5510 sets a mode for displaying the downloaded image information in accordance with the image display method instruction information 77 from the decoding unit 5504. For example, when the list display (flag) 78 of the image display method instruction information 77 is ON, the list display of the downloaded images is generated and output to the memory unit 5511. When the slide show flag 79 of the image display method instruction information 77 is ON, a slide show of the downloaded image is generated and output to the memory unit 5511.
- the memory unit 5511 includes a memory for temporarily storing the image information subjected to data processing by the data processing unit 5510.
- the display unit 5512 is a portion that displays the image data stored in the memory unit 5511 and downloaded from the server 42 and processed by the data processing unit 5510.
- the TV 45 is connected to the server 42 based on the server URL generation information 80, the photographed image status information 55, and the image display method instruction information 77 received from the RF-ID 47 of the photographing device 1.
- the image information uploaded to the server 42 can be downloaded and displayed on the display unit 5512.
- the third memory 33 constituted by the SD card and the flash memory of the photographing device 1 is taken out, attached to the card reader of the TV 45, and the photographing device is carried out without performing complicated user processing of browsing photographed images.
- a simple user operation of holding up the RF-ID 47 of 1 to the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 and performing close proximity communication makes it possible to display and browse already-captured image information and is unfamiliar with the operation of digital devices Even for the user, it is possible to realize a photographed image browsing system capable of easily browsing image information.
- FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an RF-ID wireless proximity communication operation of the photographing apparatus 1 and the TV 45.
- the communicable device search unit 5502 of the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 transmits a call signal for searching for the RF-ID 47 of the communicable photographing device 1 (step S5601).
- the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 When the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 receives the polling signal of the communicable device search unit 5502 of the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45, it activates the second power unit 91 and activates the RF-ID reader / writer 46 ( Step S5602). At this time, it is sufficient to activate at least the RF-ID 47 operable by the second power supply unit 91, and it is not necessary to activate all the functions of the imaging device 1.
- step S5602 When the activation of the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 is completed in step S5602, the polling response to the polling of the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 is transmitted from the second antenna 21 (step S5603).
- the wireless antenna 5501 of the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 receives the polling response (step S5604).
- step S5605 After the polling response is received in step S5604, it is determined whether the photographing apparatus 1 that has transmitted the polling response can communicate with each other (step S5605). If it is determined that the devices can not communicate with each other as a result of the determination, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the devices can communicate with each other, the process proceeds to the next process.
- step S5605 If it is determined in step S5605 that the devices can communicate with each other, mutual authentication processing is performed to determine whether the devices are legitimate devices (step S5606).
- This mutual authentication process is the same as a general mutual authentication process performed by HDMI or IEEE 1394, and the challenge data is issued by the TV 45 and the photographing apparatus 1 and the response data is confirmed a plurality of times. If the process is a process for generating an encryption key, and either one is an unauthorized device, a common encryption key is not generated, and subsequent mutual communication becomes invalid.
- the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 performs mutual authentication processing as in the TV 45. Generation and transmission of each other's challenge data, reception and confirmation of response data are performed, and the same encryption key data as that of the TV 45 is generated (step S5607).
- step S5607 when the mutual authentication process is completed, the server URL generation information 80 which is the server identification information 58 is read out from the second memory 52 of the photographing apparatus 1 and shared by the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 by general authentication. It encrypts with the encrypted key and transmits (step S5608).
- step S 5608 the server URL generation information 80 transmitted is received by the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 by the reception unit 5503, is decrypted by the decryption key 5504 by the decryption key 5504, and accesses the server 42. Is generated by the URL generation unit 5505, and the reception completion is transmitted to the imaging device 1 (step S5609).
- the reception completion is transmitted in step S5609, the reception completion is received by the second antenna 21 of the imaging device 1, and the photographed image status information 55 is read from the second memory 52 and transmitted to the TV 45 (step S5610).
- the photographed image status information 55 the last photographing time 68 (Case 1), the existence identifier 64 (Case 2) capable of judging whether it is the non-uploaded data added for each photographed image as the presence identification information of the unuploaded image data.
- Information 67 (Case 3) obtained by hashing the unuploaded image information or the final number 69 (Case 4) of the image of the image number temporally assigned to the photographed image is transmitted. This is information necessary to confirm synchronization of the photographed images of the photographing device 1 and the server 42.
- the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 receives the photographed image status information 55, and transmits the reception completion to the photographing apparatus 1 (step S5611). . Further, the CPU 5513 of the TV 45 performs the following processing according to the received photographed image status information 55.
- the final shooting time 68 is applied as the shot image status information 55. Therefore, if the final shooting time 68 is temporally slower than the final uploading time to the server 42 by comparing the final uploading time to the server 42 and the final shooting time 68 on the TV 45, the photographing apparatus 1 and the server 42 As the image information to be held is not synchronized, caution information indicating that the synchronization is not achieved is displayed on the display unit of the TV 45.
- the presence identifier 64 capable of determining whether the data is non-uploaded data attached to each captured image is applied as the captured image status information 55. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the unuploaded image exists by checking the presence identifier 64 capable of determining whether it is the non-uploaded data added to each captured image on the TV 45, so that the photographing device 1 and the server 42 can As the image information to be held is not synchronized, caution information indicating that the synchronization is not achieved is displayed on the display unit of the TV 45.
- the final number 69 of the image of the image number temporally assigned to the captured image is applied as the captured image status information 55. Therefore, on the TV 45, the final image number uploaded from the server 42 to the server 42 and the final number 69 of the image of the image number temporally assigned to the photographed image transmitted from the photographing apparatus 1 are confirmed. Thus, it is possible to determine that there is an unuploaded image, and it is assumed that the image information held by the photographing apparatus 1 and the server 42 is not synchronized, and the display unit of the TV 45 indicates that the synchronization is not achieved. indicate.
- the image display method instruction information 77 is read from the second memory 52 of the photographing apparatus 1 and transmitted to the TV 45 (step S5612).
- the image display method instruction information 77 includes a list display (flag) 78 and a slide show (flag) 79.
- the image display method instruction information 77 is transmitted in step S5612, the image display method instruction information 77 is received by the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45, and the reception completion is transmitted to the photographing apparatus 1 (step S5613).
- the data processing unit 5510 of the TV 45 creates a display form of the image downloaded from the server 42 based on the received image display method instruction information 77. For example, when the list display flag of the image display method instruction information 77 is ON, a list display of downloaded images is created and stored in the memory unit 5511, and the list is displayed on the display unit 5512. On the other hand, when the slide show flag of the image display method instruction information 77 is ON, a slide show display of the downloaded image is created and stored in the memory unit 5511, and the slide show is displayed on the display unit 5512.
- step S5613 After the image display method instruction information 77 is received in step S5613, the communication with the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the photographing apparatus 1 is cut off (step S5614).
- step S5615 The startup of the TV system is to turn on the main power to display image data to be downloaded on the display unit 5512. Before the TV system is activated in step S5615, at least the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 is activated, and the power of the display unit 5512 may be OFF.
- the communication unit 5506 is activated to connect to the server 42 based on the URL generated by the URL generation unit 5505 (step S5616).
- the uploaded image data is downloaded to the TV 45 (step S5617).
- step S5617 the data processing unit 5510 generates image data for display in accordance with the image display method instruction information 77 from the camera, stores the downloaded image in the memory unit 5511, and displays the image on the display unit 5512 ( Step S5618).
- the data processing unit 5510 of the TV 45 creates a display form of the image downloaded from the server 42 based on the received image display method instruction information 77. For example, when the list display flag 78 of the image display method instruction information 77 is ON, a list display of downloaded images is created and stored in the memory unit 5511, and the list is displayed on the display unit 5512. On the other hand, when the slide show flag 79 of the image display method instruction information 77 is ON, a slide show display of the downloaded image is created and stored in the memory unit 5511, and the slide show is displayed on the display unit 5512.
- step S5617 When the display processing of the image downloaded from the server 42 is completed in step S5617, is synchronization established between the captured image recorded in the third memory 33 of the imaging device 1 and the image data downloaded from the server 42? A synchronization confirmation process is performed (step S5619). The present process is performed based on the photographed image status information 55 received from the photographing device 1 in step S5611. As the photographed image status information 55, the last photographing time 68 (Case 1), the existence identifier 64 (Case 2) capable of judging whether it is the non-uploaded data added for each photographed image as the presence identification information of the unuploaded image data.
- Information 67 (Case 3) obtained by hashing the unuploaded image information or the final number 69 (Case 4) of the image of the image number temporally assigned to the photographed image is transmitted. This is information necessary to confirm synchronization of the photographed images of the photographing device 1 and the server 42.
- FIGS. 46A to 46D are flowcharts showing the flow of detailed processing in each of Case 1 to Case 4 of the photographed image status information 55 in the server synchronization confirmation processing (Step S5619) of FIG.
- Case 1 is a flowchart when the photographed image status information 55 is the final photographing time 68.
- the communication unit 5506 of the TV 45 acquires the date and time for the final update from the server 42 (even in the final shooting date and time of the updated image, the same effect) (step S5701).
- the last update date and time acquired from the server 42 is compared with the date and time 68 of the last shooting shown by the shooting image status information 55 from the shooting device 1 from the RF-ID reader / writer 46 (step S5702). If the last upload date and time is earlier than the date and time 68 of the last shooting, it is determined that the image is shot after the last upload and the shot image can not be uploaded. It is determined that the images are not synchronized, and the process proceeds to the error display process of step S5703. On the other hand, when the final upload date and time is equal to the date and time 68 taken at the last shooting, since the images of the photographing apparatus 1 and the server 42 are synchronized, the process ends without outputting an error.
- step S5702 If it is determined in step S5702 that the photographing apparatus 1 and the server 42 are not synchronized, a warning message indicating that the synchronization is not achieved is output to the display unit 5512. In this case, if time information indicating from which point in time the captured image can not be uploaded is simultaneously output as a message by comparison of the last upload date and time and the last captured date and time 68, the message can be easily understood by the user.
- Case 2 is a flow chart when the photographed image status information 55 is the presence identifier 64 which can determine whether it is un-uploaded data added for each photographed image.
- step S5711 it is determined whether there is an image that can not be uploaded to the server 42 (step S5711). If it is determined in step S5711 that there is an image that can not be uploaded, the process proceeds to the error display process of step S5712. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no image that can not be uploaded, synchronization of the images of the photographing device 1 and the server 42 is performed, so the process is ended without outputting an error.
- step S5712 If it is determined in step S5712 that the photographing apparatus 1 and the server 42 are not synchronized, a warning message indicating that the synchronization is not achieved is output to the display unit 5512.
- Case 3 is a flowchart when the photographed image status information 55 is the information 67 obtained by hashing the unuploaded image information.
- step S5721 First, among the photographed images recorded in the third memory 33 of the photographing apparatus 1 from the information 67 obtained by hashing the unuploaded image information indicated by the photographed image status information 55 from the photographing apparatus 1 from the RF-ID reader / writer 46 It is determined whether there is an image that has not been uploaded to the server 42 (step S5721). A step S5721 generates a hash value of NULL on the TV 45, and determines whether there is an unuploaded image or not by the comparison. If it is determined in step S5721 that there is an image that can not be uploaded, the process proceeds to an error display process of step S5722. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no image that can not be uploaded, synchronization of the images of the photographing device 1 and the server 42 is performed, so the process is ended without outputting an error.
- step S 5722 If it is determined in step S 5722 that the photographing apparatus 1 and the server 42 are not synchronized, a warning message indicating that the synchronization is not achieved is output to the display unit 5512.
- Case 4 is a flowchart when it is the number of the final captured image among the numbers assigned to the captured image of the captured image status information 55.
- the communication unit 5506 of the TV 45 acquires the image number of the final update image from the server 42 (step S5731).
- the final upload image number 69 obtained from the server 42 is compared with the final number 69 of the image indicated by the photographed image status information 55 from the RF-ID reader / writer 46 from the photographing device 1 (step S5732). If the number of the final upload image is smaller than the number 69 of the last captured image, it is determined that the image is captured after the last upload and the captured image can not be uploaded. It is determined that the images of the server 42 have not been synchronized, and the process proceeds to an error display process of step S5733. On the other hand, if the number of the final upload image is equal to the number 69 of the last captured image, synchronization of the images of the imaging device 1 and the server 42 is performed, so processing is performed without outputting an error. finish.
- step S5732 If it is determined in step S5732 that the photographing apparatus 1 and the server 42 are not synchronized, a warning message indicating that the synchronization is not achieved is output to the display unit 5512.
- FIGS. 47A and 47B show respective data formats in the case of (1) uploading a captured image from the imaging device 1 to the server 42, and (2) RF-ID communication between the imaging device 1 and the TV 45.
- a data format 5940 in the case of uploading a captured image from the imaging device 1 to the server 42 will be described.
- This format includes a camera ID 5901, a server address 5902, a server login ID 5903, a server login password 5904, an image directory 5905, and the number of uploaded images 5906.
- the camera ID 5901 is a camera unique ID uniquely assigned to each camera, and is ID information recorded in the camera ID unit 76 of the second memory 52 of the photographing device 1.
- ID information recorded in the camera ID unit 76 of the second memory 52 of the photographing device 1.
- the server 42 can also manage a captured image for each captured camera.
- the server address 5902 is the content of the server address information 81 of the server identification information 58 of the second memory 52 of the photographing apparatus 1. By this, the uploaded server can be specified on the TV 45 side.
- the server login ID 5903 is the content of the login ID 83 which is the user identification information 82 of the server identification information 58 of the second memory 52 of the photographing apparatus 1. As a result, login to the server uploaded from the photographing apparatus 1 with the same account becomes possible even with the TV 45.
- the server login password 5904 is the content of the password 84 of the server identification information 58 of the second memory 52 of the photographing apparatus 1. As a result, login to the server uploaded from the photographing apparatus 1 with the same account becomes possible even with the TV 45.
- the number of uploaded images 5906 is the number of images to be uploaded to the server.
- the number is the same as the number of images stored in the number 65 of the unuploaded images in the second memory 52 of the photographing device 1, and the number of images not uploaded to the server after photographing is described.
- This format is: camera ID 5911, server address 5902, server login ID 5913, server login password 5914, last shooting date 5915, identification information 5916 which can be judged as unuploaded, information 5917 having hashed unuploaded image information, final photography It consists of an image number 5918 of an image and image display method instruction information 5919.
- the camera ID 5911 is a camera unique ID uniquely assigned to each camera, and is ID information recorded in the camera ID unit 76 of the second memory 52 of the photographing device 1.
- the real ID information as a login ID from the TV 45 to the server 42, it becomes possible to assign a unique server address to each photographing device 1 without the user inputting the login ID. Also, it may be used at the time of mutual authentication between the RF-ID 47 of the photographing apparatus 1 and the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45.
- the server address 5912 is the content of the server address information 81 of the server identification information 58 of the second memory 52 of the photographing apparatus 1. By this, the uploaded server can be specified on the TV 45 side.
- the server login ID 5913 is the content of the login ID 83 which is the user identification information 82 of the server identification information 58 of the second memory 52 of the photographing apparatus 1. As a result, login to the server uploaded from the photographing apparatus 1 with the same account becomes possible even with the TV 45.
- the server login password 5914 is the content of the password 84 of the server identification information 58 of the second memory 52 of the photographing apparatus 1. As a result, login to the server uploaded from the photographing apparatus 1 with the same account becomes possible even with the TV 45.
- the final shooting date 5915 is information corresponding to the time 68 captured at the end of the captured image status information 55 of the second memory 52 of the imaging device 1, and the synchronization confirmation of the captured image of the server 42 and the imaging device 1 is made on the TV 45 side. Used for
- the identification information 5916 that can be determined to be not uploaded is information corresponding to the non-uploaded image data presence identification information of the photographed image status information 55 of the second memory 52 of the photographing apparatus 1 and It is used for synchronization confirmation of a photographed image of the photographing device 1. Further, the identification information 5916 which can be determined that the document has not been uploaded has an upload flag 5926 indicating whether the upload to the server is completed for the image ID 5928 which can identify each photographed image. It is a form. This makes it possible to determine whether each captured image is uploaded to the server.
- the information 5917 obtained by hashing the non-upload image information is information corresponding to the information 67 obtained by hashing the non-upload image information of the captured image status information 55 of the second memory 52 of the imaging device 1. It is used for synchronization confirmation of the photographed image of the device 1.
- the image number 5918 of the final captured image is information corresponding to the final number 69 of the captured image of the captured image status information 55 of the second memory 52 of the capturing device 1 and the captured image of the server 42 and the capturing device 1 on the TV 45 side. It is used to confirm the synchronization of
- the image display method instruction information 5919 is information corresponding to the image display method instruction information 77 of the captured image status information 55 of the second memory 52 of the imaging device 1 and the method for viewing the image downloaded from the server 42 on the TV 45 side is Composed of identification information to be specified.
- the image display method instruction information 5919 includes a list display flag 5920, a slide show flag 5921, a print flag 5922, a moving image reproduction flag 5923, a download flag 5924, and a security password 5925 for each image ID 5927.
- the image ID 5927 is information unique to the photographed image, and is assigned by the photographing device 1 in time series at the time of photographing.
- the list display flag 5920 corresponds to the list display (flag) 78 of the second memory 52 of the photographing apparatus 1 and is a flag as to whether or not browsing of the image information downloaded from the server 42 in the TV 45 is in a list format. If the flag is "yes", the data processing unit 5510 of the TV 45 creates a list display of the downloaded images, stores it in the memory unit 5511, and displays it in the list form on the display unit 5512.
- the slide show flag corresponds to the slide show (flag) 79 in the second memory 52 of the photographing apparatus 1 and is a flag indicating whether the viewing of the image information downloaded from the server 42 in the TV 45 is a slide show.
- the flag is "automatic"
- the data processing unit 5510 of the TV 45 creates a slide show of the downloaded images, stores it in the memory unit 5511, and displays the slide show on the display unit 5512.
- the slide show flag is "manual”, it is permitted to carry out the slide show according to the user's instruction. In the case of "disable", the slide show display is not permitted.
- the print flag 5922 is a flag indicating whether the image downloaded to the TV 45 and displayed on the display unit 5512 can be printed by a printer (not shown) connected to the TV 45. Although this is not illustrated in the image display method instruction information 77 of the second memory 52 of the photographing apparatus 1, by providing a print flag, it is possible to set whether printing is possible or not, and relates to the use of the image by the user. It is possible to improve the convenience.
- the moving image reproduction flag 5923 is a flag as to whether or not the moving image is downloaded by the TV 45 and viewed when the moving image information is photographed by the photographing apparatus 1 and uploaded to the server 42.
- setting of whether to allow the moving image reproduction is made by giving the main moving image reproduction flag 5923 to the image display method instruction information 77 of the second memory 52. It becomes possible to add, and it becomes possible to perform reproduction management of a moving image, without performing complicated operation of the user.
- the download flag 5924 is an identifier indicating whether it is possible to download (copy) an image or video uploaded to the server 42 to the memory of the TV 45. If this flag is used, the photographed image can not be copied by a third party who is not permitted, and therefore, it is possible to connect also to copyright protection.
- the security password 5925 is password information for enabling only the user who has permitted the image browsing, printing, and downloading described above.
- the same password is set for browsing, printing, and downloading of the image described above.
- security measures can be implemented at each level. Still better.
- the imaging device 1 uploads the captured image to the server connected by the first antenna. Further, if the photographing device 1 is held over the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45, the server URL generation information 80, the photographed image status information 55 and the image display method instruction information 77 from the RF-ID 47 of the photographing device 1 Thus, the TV 45 is transmitted to the TV 45, the TV 45 is connected to the server to which the photographed image is uploaded by the photographing device 1, and the image photographed by the photographing device 1 is downloaded to the TV 45 and displayed.
- the synchronization between the server 42 and the photographed image information of the photographing device 1 is confirmed by the photographed image status information 55, and when the synchronization is not obtained, the effect is displayed on the display unit 5512 of the TV 45. Therefore, the user can extract the conventional recording memory from the camera and set it on the TV 45 so that the display of the captured image can be handled simply by holding the photographing device 1 over the TV 45. Become. By this, even a user who is not used to the operation of the digital device can easily display the photographed image on the TV 45.
- FIG. 48 is a schematic block diagram of an electronic catalog display system of the third embodiment.
- the electronic catalog display system according to the third embodiment includes an electronic catalog server information input device 500 including an RF-ID writer unit 501, an electronic catalog notification card 502 including an RF-ID 47, an RF-ID reader unit 504, and network communication. And an electronic catalog server 506 having an electronic catalog database 507 and a customer attribute database 508.
- the electronic catalog server information input device 500 writes the electronic catalog server information input from the user (the service provider of the electronic catalog) from the RF-ID writer unit 501 to the RF-ID 47 attached to the electronic catalog notification card 502 .
- the RF-ID reader unit 504 provided in the TV 45 is written in the RF-ID 47 Read electronic catalog server information.
- the TV 45 transmits an electronic catalog acquisition request to the electronic catalog server 506 installed on the network via the network communication unit 509 based on the read electronic catalog server information.
- the TV 45 when transmitting the electronic catalog acquisition request to the electronic catalog server, the TV 45 simultaneously transmits the user information input to the TV 45 to the electronic catalog server 506 at the same time.
- the electronic catalog server 506 receives the electronic catalog transmission request and the user information from the TV 45, and first acquires customer attribute data from the customer attribute database 508 based on the user information. Next, based on the customer attribute data, the corresponding electronic catalog data is acquired from the electronic catalog database 507. Then, the acquired electronic catalog data is transmitted to the TV 45 that issued the electronic catalog request.
- the TV 45 displays the electronic catalog data received from the electronic catalog server 506 on the screen, and accepts a purchase operation of a product in the electronic catalog data from a user (a service user of the electronic catalog).
- FIG. 49 is a functional block diagram showing the configuration of the electronic catalog server information input device of the third embodiment.
- the key input acceptance unit 520 receives an input from an input key operated by a user (a service provider of an electronic catalog), and acquires electronic catalog server information.
- the electronic catalog server information acquired by the key input acceptance unit 520 lists server images such as URL, server login ID, server login password, electronic catalog display password, and images of products included in the electronic catalog (thumbnails) 2.
- Electronic catalog display information indicating whether to display or sequentially (slide) display, and media identification information indicating media such as cards and postcards to which the RF-ID is to be attached.
- the electronic catalog server information acquired by the key input acceptance unit 520 is stored in the storage unit 522.
- the RF-ID transmission input acceptance unit 521 notifies the transmission unit 523 of a transmission request, and the transmission unit 523 stores The electronic catalog server information is read out from the unit 522, and the electronic catalog server information is transmitted from the antenna unit 524. Details of the process of the electronic catalog server information input device are shown by the flowchart of FIG.
- FIG. 51 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RF-ID 47 provided in the electronic catalog notification card 502. As shown in FIG. The configuration and processing of the RF-ID 47 are the same as those described in the first and second embodiments.
- the second power supply unit 91 extracts current from the signal received from the second antenna 21 to supply power to each unit, and the data reception unit 105, the second processing unit 95, and the recording unit 106 receive the received data in the second memory 52. Record to
- FIG. 52 is a functional block diagram showing a configuration of the TV 45.
- the configuration of the TV 45 in the third embodiment is a configuration in which a user information input unit 588 is added to the configuration in the second embodiment.
- the user information input unit 588 receives user information regarding the user's own attributes, which is input in advance by a user (a service user of an electronic catalog), and temporarily stores the user information in the memory unit 583.
- user information for example, gender information and age information of the user are preferable, but personal information that can be used to sort product data provided from an electronic catalog, such as residence or family structure, is also possible. Good.
- the user information is transmitted to the electronic catalog server via the communication unit 509 together with the URL of the electronic catalog server generated by the URL generation unit.
- the electronic catalog service user brings the electronic catalog notification card 502 close to the RF-ID reader unit 504 of the TV 45, so that the TV 45 receives electronic catalog server information, Use this to generate a URL for the server and connect to the server.
- the details of this process are similar to the processes shown in FIGS. 7 to 20A and 20B of the first embodiment.
- FIG. 53 is a functional block diagram showing the configuration of the electronic catalog server 506.
- the electronic catalog server 506 receives the electronic catalog transmission destination address (the TV 45 and the network address of the TV 45 on the network to which the electronic catalog server 506 belongs) and the user information transmitted from the TV 45 via the communication unit 600.
- the customer attribute data is acquired from the customer attribute database 508. For example, when the gender and the age of the user who uses the TV 45 are included in the user information, the customer attribute database 508 having the data structure shown in FIG. Information is acquired as customer attribute data.
- the electronic catalog data acquisition unit 602 acquires electronic catalog data from the electronic catalog database 507 based on the customer attribute data.
- product data corresponding to the product genre and the product price range are collected from the electronic catalog database 507 having the data structure shown in FIG. Get as.
- the electronic catalog data acquired by the electronic catalog data acquisition unit 602 is transmitted to the TV 45 indicated by the electronic catalog transmission destination address via the communication unit 600. Details of the process of the electronic catalog server 506 are shown in the flowchart of FIG.
- the process of acquiring electronic catalog server information from the RF-ID in S630 to S632 is the same whether electronic catalog data is not downloaded or after the download is completed.
- the data download process is similar to the data download process in the first embodiment.
- a key signal of a predetermined key set in advance for example, a confirmation key
- an operation is performed on the displayed electronic catalog data.
- the screen configuration is to present the operation to be performed next by the user with the electronic catalog data being displayed with a few small options.
- options 652 and 653 in 56 the screen configuration is such that the focus indicating the selection candidate moves between the options after a predetermined time elapses. In this way, the user holds the electronic catalog notification card 502 equipped with the RF-ID 47 over the TV 45 when the option he / she desires is focused on, thereby selecting electronic catalog data, purchasing each data, etc.
- the operation can be performed.
- the second memory 52 built in the RF-ID 47 on the electronic catalog notification card 502 of this embodiment may be a ROM (Read Only Memory).
- the electronic catalog server information input unit 500 is an RF-ID memory data input unit in the RF-ID manufacturing process or an RF-ID memory data input unit in the RF-ID manufacturing system.
- ROM type RF- for an electronic catalog service provider who sends a large number of electronic catalog notification cards. The cost can be reduced by using the ID.
- the focus indicating the selection candidate moves between the options every predetermined time, but the RF-ID 47
- the method of operating the electronic catalog data displayed on the screen using the provided electronic catalog notification card 502 is not limited to this.
- the reception unit 571 of the TV 45 continuously receives the information transmitted from the RF-ID and measures the number of continuous receptions, thereby acquiring the time when the RF-ID is brought close to the TV 45, The focus indicating the selection candidate displayed on the screen may be moved based on the RF-ID proximity time.
- the focus displayed on the screen moves to change the selection candidate while moving the RF-ID close to the TV, and the focus moves when the RF-ID is released from the TV.
- the electronic catalog can be operated such that the selection of the selection candidate whose focus has been stopped is confirmed when a predetermined time elapses after the movement of the focus is further stopped.
- the user actively uses the RF-ID to electronically catalog the electronic catalog, without waiting for the focus of automatically cycling the selection candidate at predetermined time intervals to the option desired by the user. The effect of being able to operate is obtained.
- the electronic catalog server information input device 500 is configured such that the key input acceptance unit 520 receives an input from an input key operated by the user (service provider of the electronic catalog) and acquires electronic catalog server information.
- the electronic catalog server information input device has a communication interface with the image server, the image server holds server information to be sent to the electronic catalog server information input device, and the electronic catalog server information input device is from the image server to the server Information may be received and acquired.
- server information is input to the image server, there is no need to input the image server on the electronic catalog server information input device side, and in particular, a plurality of electronic catalogs for one image server. Convenience is high when operating a server information input device.
- Embodiment 4 A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
- FIG. 59 is a schematic block diagram of the fourth embodiment.
- a method of sending a postcard to which an RF-ID for access to an image server is attached to a remote place will be described.
- the TV 45 generates a server URL for connecting to the image server 42
- Image data is acquired from the image server 42 and displayed on the screen. This process is similar to that of the first embodiment.
- the first user corresponds to the image to be printed on the postcard and the image to be registered in association with the postcard (to be shown to a second user at a remote location) It selects using input means, such as a remote control. Furthermore, the first user also inputs delivery destination information such as a delivery destination address of the postcard using a remote control or the like.
- the TV 45 transmits the ID of the image to be printed on the postcard selected by the first user, the ID of the image to be registered in the postcard, and the postcard delivery destination information to the image server 42.
- the image server 42 acquires the image data corresponding to the received print image ID, and transmits the image data and the postcard delivery destination information to the printer 800.
- the printer 800 prints the image data and the postcard delivery address on the postcard.
- the image server 42 transmits the registered image ID received from the TV 45 to the image server information input device 500, and at the same time, a server address such as a URL, a server login ID, a server login password, and an image display password , Image display information indicating whether images are to be displayed as a list (thumbnails) or sequentially (slides), and image server information including media identification information indicating media such as cards and postcards to which RF-IDs are to be attached Send.
- the image server information input device 500 writes the image server information and the registered image ID into the RF-ID 47 of the postcard on which the image and the transmission destination information are printed by the printer.
- the postcard 801 on which printing and writing to the RF-ID have been performed is mailed to the printed destination, and the second user designated by the first user as the destination acquires the postcard 801.
- the TV 45 acquires the image server information and the registered image ID stored in the RF-ID 47, and the registered image ID Download and display the corresponding image data from the server.
- the configuration and processing of the photographing device 1 of the present embodiment are the same as those of the first embodiment.
- FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the TV 45 of this embodiment.
- the reception unit 811 receives image server information from the RF-ID 47 of the imaging device 1 or postcard 801 via the wireless antenna 570, but also receives the registered image ID when the RF-ID 47 of the postcard 801 has a registered image ID.
- the image selection unit 584 receives an image selection operation of the user via the key unit 585 and the infrared light receiving unit 586, and the ID (printed image ID) of the image selected by the first user for printing on the postcard, and the postcard The ID of the image selected for registration in (registration image ID) is acquired, and these are sent to the communication unit 509.
- An example of screen display displayed on the TV 45 at the time of this image selection operation is shown in FIG.
- reference numeral 821 denotes a screen display for selecting an image to be printed on a postcard
- reference numeral 820 in FIG. 61 denotes a screen display for selecting an image to be registered in the postcard.
- the postcard delivery destination information input unit 810 receives the user's character input operation through the key unit 585 and the infrared light receiving unit 586, acquires the postcard delivery destination information including the address and the addressee to be the delivery destination of the postcard, and communicates Send to section 509.
- An example of a screen display at the time of inputting the postcard delivery destination information is shown at 823 in FIG.
- the communication unit 509 transmits the postcard delivery destination information, the print image ID, and the registered image ID to the image server via the transmission unit 575 and the communication interface 576.
- FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a process of preparing the image server 42, the printer 800 and the image server information input device 500 so that the postcard 801 can be sent.
- the postcard 801 on which printing and writing to the RF-ID are performed is mailed to the printed destination, and the second user designated by the first user as the destination acquires the postcard 801.
- the receiving unit 811 receives the image server information and the registered image ID transmitted by the RF-ID 47 via the wireless antenna 570.
- the information encrypted in the image server information and the registered image ID is decrypted by the decryption unit 572.
- the URL generation unit 573 generates a URL for downloading to the TV 45 only the image data corresponding to the registered image ID out of the image data stored in the image server 42. Specifically, it is possible to specify the server's internal directory in the generated URL, or to use a method of embedding the registered image ID in the URL as a URL option.
- the details of the process in which the TV 45 accesses the image server and acquires the image data using the URL specifying the server generated by the URL generation unit 573 are the same as the process described in the first embodiment.
- the user inputs the transmission destination information to the TV 45.
- the transmission destination information such as the address and the address but also a message to be printed together with the image on the postcard may be input.
- the input message received by the TV 45 is sent from the TV 45 to the image server 42 and printed on a postcard by the printer 800, as with the destination information.
- An example of an input screen of a message for printing on the TV 45 is shown at 822 in FIG.
- the image displayed on the TV 45 using the RF-ID-added postcard is the same as the process of operating the electronic catalog displayed on the screen using the RF-ID in the third embodiment. It may be configured to be operable.
- the system described in the fourth embodiment it is possible to mail the RF-ID-attached postcard to a remote party without preparing the postcard to which the RF-ID is attached at hand.
- the image stored in the image server is to be printed and sent on a postcard, it is possible to select the image to be printed by the operation on the TV screen, and high convenience can be obtained.
- fixed information is written in a postage such as a postcard, and in the photographing apparatus, the fixed information written is linked to an image or an image group (image information) stored in the server.
- image information image information
- FIG. 63 first, the fixed information recorded in the mailed item is read by the photographing device, the image is associated with the mailed product unique ID, and registered in the server. The user who received the registered mail has read the fixed information by bringing the mailed article close to the RF-ID reader of the television, and is related to the mail by making an inquiry to the server using the unique information. Browse the images.
- the point of this embodiment is that the information of the RF-ID attached to the mailed item can not be rewritten (ROM) or an environment where it can not be rewritten, and the server image can be obtained without rewriting fixed information of the mailed item.
- the point is to associate information with mailings.
- the image captured by the imaging device is uploaded to the server by the method described in the previous embodiment.
- an identifier is given to each uploaded image or image group, and the identifier enables identification of the image or image group on the server.
- FIGS. 64A to 64C show information such as a mail-print unique ID unique to the mailed article and an address for accessing the image server
- FIG. 64B shows information such as an mail unique ID and an address for accessing the relay server. Is an example in which only the shipment unique ID is recorded.
- login ID and password information for accessing the server may be stored, in the present embodiment, the information necessary for accessing the server is included in the URL including the address information. It is assumed that
- FIG. 65 is a flowchart of associating the RF-ID with the image information recorded in the server when the imaging device has the function of an RF-ID reader.
- the photographing apparatus first, the information stored in the RF-ID of the mailed item is read using the RF-ID reader (S2500). Specifically, the second antenna 21 of FIG. 3 communicates with the RF-ID of the mailed item, and the data receiving unit 105 receives the fixed information of the mailed item. Thereafter, processing is performed by the second processing unit 95, and the read mail information is transferred to the first processing unit 35 via the recording unit 106, the second memory 52, and the recording and reproducing unit 51. In the first processing unit, the association between the mailed product unique ID read out from the mailed product and the image or the image group is determined according to the instruction of the user (S2501). Thereafter, the server 42 is accessed via the first antenna 20 (S2502), and association information between the mailed product unique ID and the image information stored in the server is registered in the server (S2503).
- the process is completed. If the fixed information stored in the read mail contains the address of the image server or the URL including the address, the process is completed. If the fixed information stored in the mailpiece does not contain the address of the image server or the URL including the address, the setting to the relay server is performed (FIG. 66).
- access to the relay server is performed (S2510). If there is an address of the relay server or the URL including the address in the information read from the mailed item, the relay server included in the read information is not included or, if there is no relay server, set in advance in the photographing apparatus. to access.
- the mailed product unique ID is associated with the server of the redirect destination (transfer destination) in the database of the relay server (S2511).
- the correspondence between the mail unique ID and the transfer destination address is registered in the relay server database.
- the imaging device does not have the function of an RF-ID reader and a two-dimensional code or the like recording the information of the RF-ID reader is printed on the mailed item
- imaging is performed using the imaging unit of the imaging device And read out the information recorded as a two-dimensional code to read out the same information as the fixed information recorded in the RF-ID of the mailed item.
- a two-dimensional code there are QR code, PDF 417, Veri code, maxi code, etc., but if it is possible to take in information by photographing with a photographing device other than the one described here You may use something.
- the printing area area increases, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be expected even when a barcode in only one dimension is used.
- FIG. 67 shows an example of a mailing in which an RF-ID unit 2520 is attached and a two-dimensional code 2521 in which the same information is recorded is printed.
- the flow of data in the case where a two-dimensional code is read by a photographing device will be described using the configuration diagram of FIG.
- the two-dimensional code printed on the mailed item is photographed by the imaging unit 30, converted into an image by the video processing unit 31, and then sent to the first processing unit 35 via the recording and reproducing unit 32.
- the first processing unit 35 analyzes the photographed two-dimensional code and takes out the information recorded in the two-dimensional code.
- the information recorded in the two-dimensional code is basically the same as the information recorded in the RF-ID, and includes at least a mailed product unique ID.
- a two-dimensional code is photographed by the imaging unit (S2530).
- the code is a two-dimensional code
- the two-dimensional code is analyzed (S2533), and information on a mailed item is read out from the analysis result (S2534). After the fixed information of the mailed item is read out, the link between the mailed product unique ID and the image information of the server is determined (S2535), the server is accessed (S2536), and the link information is set in the server (S2537).
- the processes of S2535 to S2537 are the same as the processes of S2501 to S2503 of FIG. If the read information does not include the address of the image server or the URL including the address, transfer setting processing to the relay server is performed.
- the setting process for the relay server is the process of FIG. 66 described above.
- the imaging device does not have an RF-ID reader function and a code such as a two-dimensional code is not printed on the mail, manually send the URL such as the mail unique ID printed on the mail or the server address directly to the camera By inputting, it is also possible to read out information of mailed items by the photographing device.
- the manual input is performed by button operations 7 to 15 in FIG. 2B.
- the unique ID of the URL or the mail may be directly printed in plain text or may be encoded into an easy-to-enter code. If it is encoded, decoding processing is performed by the imaging device after the input is completed, and the information in which the RF-ID of the mailed item is recorded is taken out.
- FIG. 69 shows the process flow of television from reading the RF-ID of a mailed article to accessing the image server.
- the information of the RF-ID of the mailed item is read into the television (S2540). If there is a URL including a server address or a server address in the read information (S2541), the designated server is accessed (S2542), and the mailed product unique ID is transmitted (S2543). If the other party is the relay server (S2544), redirection to the server specified by the relay server is performed (2547), and the image server or image group is accessed (S2548). If it is determined in S2544 that the other party is the image server, redirection is not performed, and the image server is accessed (S2548).
- the server address does not exist in the information recorded in the mail
- the default server preset in the television is accessed (S2545), and the mail ID is set to the default server.
- Send (S2546).
- redirection to the designated server is performed (S2547), and access to the image server is performed.
- FIG. 70 is a process flow of the relay server and the default server after receiving the mailer unique ID.
- the mailed product unique ID is received (S2550)
- it is searched whether the information related to this unique ID is recorded in the database (S2551). If it is recorded in the database (S2552), redirection to a server recorded in the database in association with the unique ID is performed (S2554). If there is no association, redirection to an error page is performed (S2553).
- the RF-ID of the mailing is associated by associating the mailing with the fixed RF-ID information in advance with the image information of the image server and holding the correlated mailing to the television. , And the image or image group recorded in the image server and associated with the mailed product unique ID can be browsed. For example, even if the RF-ID of the mailing can not be rewritten or the RF-ID of the mailing can not be rewritten, the server image and the mailing can be associated. In this way, it is possible to allow the side receiving the mail to view the image associated with the mail.
- the RF-ID can not be rewritten, such as a tourist destination
- the acquaintance who received the message can make it possible to browse photos at a tourist destination by holding a postcard over the television.
- the television apparatus When the photographing apparatus is provided with an RF-ID writer function for rewriting the RF-ID of the mailed item, the television apparatus according to the sixth embodiment described below is used to send mail and server image information.
- the flow and process to be associated are the same, so the description here is omitted.
- a user on the image transmitting side (hereinafter referred to as a transmitter) generates an image group from an image of the image server.
- the information for accessing this image group is recorded in the RF-ID on the mailing list, and is mailed under the user of the image receiving side (hereinafter referred to as the receiver) on the mailing list.
- FIG. 71 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the image transmission side in the sixth embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the image reception side in the sixth embodiment of the present invention.
- the same components as those in FIGS. 1 and 3 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.
- a mailed item 3001 indicates a postcard sent by the image transmitting side to the image receiving side, or a mailed item such as an envelope or letter paper
- the RF-ID unit 3002 is a rewritable RF-ID.
- at least a part of the area includes the rewritable memory unit 3003.
- the RF-ID unit 3002 is attached to or looked into the mailed product 3001, and is sent to the image receiving side together with the mailed product.
- media identification information for identifying that the medium to which the RF-ID unit belongs is a mailed item is recorded in the memory unit 3003. ing.
- a television 3045 is a television display device installed on the image receiving side having the same function as the TV 45 of FIG. 71 described in the above embodiment, and like the TV 45 of FIG. 71 by a network connection means not shown in the figure, having an ID reader / writer unit 3046 (corresponding to the RF-ID reader / writer 46 in FIG. 71) and a display unit 3047 (corresponding to the display unit 110 in FIG. 71) It is connected with the Internet 40.
- an image captured by the imaging device 1 is sent to a wireless access point using a wireless LAN mounted on the imaging device 1 or a second antenna 20 for wireless communication such as WiMAX. It is recorded as image data 50 of the image server 42 via the Internet 40. Then, the imaging device 1 is brought close to the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45, and a connection with the TV 45 is established by wireless communication via the first antenna 21 for RF-ID mounted on the imaging device 1.
- the TV 45 acquires information for accessing the image data 50 of the image server 42 from the photographing device 1, downloads the image of the image data 50, and displays the image on the display unit 110.
- the above operation is the same as the operation described in the above embodiment, and only the outline is described.
- the transmitter checks whether the image is an image to be transmitted to the receiver for each image, in other words, whether to permit the recipient to view
- the transmission image selection information shown is set.
- the usage pattern information such as the display limitation, slide show, and printing described in the above embodiment can be set for the recipient.
- the transmission image selection information and the usage form information are transmitted to and recorded in the image server, and a set of images selected as the transmission image by the transmission image selection information is managed by the image server as an image group.
- the transmitter is the RF-ID reader / writer of the TV 45, with the mailed product 3001 having the RF-ID unit 3002 in a state where the transmission image selection as described above and the creation of the image group in which the usage type information is set is completed. Close to 46, the RF-ID unit 3002 and the RF-ID reader / writer 46 can communicate wirelessly.
- the TV 45 When the TV 45 can communicate with the RF-ID unit 3002 on the mailed item 3001 through the RF-ID reader / writer 46, the TV 45 reads the information recorded in the memory unit 3003 (S3101), and identifies the media in it. From the information, it is identified that the current communication target is a mail, and the process proceeds to the flow of the writing process for the mail (S3102). Although the case in which the condition determination in step S3102 is not established is not particularly mentioned, it is assumed that the processing shifts to processing according to each medium.
- the image server 42 is accessed via the Internet 40 (S3103), and a server URL, an image group address, etc. for the image receiving side to access the image group on the image server 42 described above.
- Image group designation information is acquired from the image server 42 (S3104).
- the image group designation information acquired from the image server is transmitted to the RF-ID unit 3002 of the mailed item 3001 via the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the TV 45 in order to write in the memory unit 3003 in the mailed item 3001.
- the information is recorded in the rewritable area of the memory unit 3003 by the RF-ID unit 3002 (S3105).
- the mailed product 3001 in which the image group designation information is recorded is deposited by the sender and mailed under the user of the image receiving side.
- FIG. 72 is a schematic view of the configuration of the image receiving side
- FIG. 74 is an operation flowchart of the image receiving side television.
- the receiver receives the mailed product 3001 mailed from the sender, and the receiver receives the mail information by the RF-ID section 3002 or the character information or design described on the mailed product 3001. Recognize that the object has a means for access to the image.
- the receiver need only understand that access to the image is possible by the mailed product 3001, and it is not necessary to be particularly aware of the image group designation information of the RF-ID unit 3002.
- the receiver can start browsing the image by bringing the mailed product 3001 closer to the RF-ID reader / writer unit 3046 of the television 3045 installed on the image receiving side.
- the RF-ID reader / writer unit 3046 and the RF-ID reader / writer unit 3046 (not shown) Power is supplied through both antennas of the RF-ID unit 3002, whereby the RF-ID unit 3002 of the mailed item 3001 is activated, and wireless communication between the television 3045 and the RF-ID unit 3002 of the mailed item 3001 is performed. It is started. When wireless communication is started, the television 3045 reads the information recorded in the memory unit 3003 of the RF-ID unit 3002 (S 3151).
- the process proceeds to a process flow of reading out the image group set by the sender from the image server 42 (S 3152) .
- the image group designation information in the information read from the RF-ID unit 3002 in the previous step S3151 for example, server URL, image group address, etc. It becomes possible to generate the URL for the access of and to access via the Internet 40 (S3153).
- the television 3045 connected to the image server 42 reads the image permitted to be displayed from the image data 50 on the image server 42 according to the transmission image selection information of the image group managed by the image server 42 ( S3154)
- the read image is displayed on the display unit 110 (S3155).
- the receiver through the television 3045 plays the slide show, prints the image, and is attached to the television 3045 (not shown) according to the transmission image selection information of the image group managed by the image server 42 and the usage form information. It is possible to use functions such as downloading of an image to an externally connected storage medium.
- the user can access the image data 50 stored in the image server 42 by an intuitive and easy operation of bringing the mailed item 3001 close to the television 3045, and the complicated procedure such as menu selection and character input to the receiver is possible. It realizes the delivery of images via the image server without requiring the knowledge to do.
- the mailed product 3001 is described as being in a state in which the RF-ID unit 3002 is attached or seen in advance, but in mailed items such as ordinary postcards and stationery, It may be created by pasting a single RF-ID unit 3002 provided separately, and according to this, the RF-ID unit can be pasted later and the above effect can be obtained, so transmission There is a new advantage that it can be used for any shipment according to the preferences of the side user.
- the server login ID and the server are written at the time of writing in the rewritable area of the memory unit 3003 of the RF-ID unit 3002 on the mailed item 3001 (step S3105).
- the login password may be recorded. Furthermore, it is desirable to secure security by recording the login ID and the login password not in plain text but in an encrypted form.
- selection of a transmission image, setting of usage mode information, and writing of image group designation information to the RF-ID unit 3002 on the mailed item 3001 are performed by the TV 45 on the image transmission side.
- the setting of the transmission image selection information and the usage pattern information and the writing of the image group designation information are performed by the imaging device 1 having the RF-ID reader / writer function in the same manner as described above, The effect of enabling delivery of the image by simple operation of the receiver is obtained.
- 75A and 75B are flowcharts showing the operation of the TV 45 on the image transmitting side according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- the same steps as those in FIG. 73 carry the same reference numerals for which the description is omitted.
- the mailed product unique ID is recorded in advance in the memory unit 3003 of the RF-ID unit 3002 on the mailed product 3001. Then, it is desirable that the mail item unique ID is recorded in the ROM area of the memory unit 3003 in that the risk of data corruption or data falsification due to an unexpected operation can be reduced.
- a configuration diagram showing an example of the data structure of the memory unit 3003 at this time is shown in FIG.
- the operation of the TV 45 is as follows.
- the TV 45 After the reading of the information of the mailing RF-ID (S3101) and the recognition of the mail item by the media identification information (S3102), the TV 45 acquires the mailing unique ID.
- the mail-print unique ID may be acquired using the information read in step S3101 or may be acquired from the RF-ID unit 3002 again.
- the TV 45 accesses the image server 42 via the Internet 40 (S3202), and the mail product unique ID is transmitted from the TV 45 to the image server 42, and the image server 42 receives the mail product unique ID sent.
- the image group is associated with the address, and the information is recorded and managed (S3203).
- the TV 45 acquires a server URL for accessing the image server 42 from the image receiving side from the image server 42 (S3204), and the acquired server URL is RF-ID of the mailed item 3001 via the RF-ID reader / writer 46.
- the data is written to the rewritable area of the memory unit 3003 of the ID unit 3002 (S3205).
- an image reception side is set by setting an image group for each individual mailpiece, generating different image group addresses, and writing each in an RF-ID portion. Similar effects to the above can be obtained, but a complicated operation of the image transmission side to set an image group individually occurs.
- the usage form information is recorded and managed individually using the unique ID of the mailpiece as described above, thereby alleviating the operation of the sender, and on the image server side, the transmission image A further effect of reducing the storage capacity can be obtained because it is not necessary to store selection information separately.
- FIG. 75 (b) portions different from FIG. 75 (a) are step S3214 and step S3215, and in step S3214, an image group address is acquired in addition to the server URL, and in step S3215 In addition, the image group address is written to the writable area of the memory unit 3003 of the RF-ID unit 3002.
- the user at the remote site learns the operation of the device or the operation master searches the remote location to operate the device.
- the user at the remote location displays a physical medium such as a postcard with an RF-ID. Images can be viewed easily with a simple operation of approaching to.
- the fourth embodiment is a mode in which the service provider performs the creation of the RF-ID-postcard and the writing of the data to the RF-ID, not the user (photographer / sender of image or viewer of image).
- the present embodiment is different in that the user (sender) on the image transmitting side creates an RF-ID-added postcard and writes data to the RF-ID.
- FIG. 77 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the recorder of the present invention.
- the recorder 2000 performs recording of the broadcast content acquired from the tuner 2001 on the HDD 2008 and the optical disk drive 2009, and reproduction of the recorded content and video / music content read by the optical disk drive 2009 on the TV 45.
- the input signal processing unit 2002 includes an A / D converter that converts an analog signal input from the tuner 2001 into a digital signal, a decoder that decodes scrambled content, and an encoder that converts it into a video format such as MPEG-2. It converts the input video and audio signals into a predetermined video and audio format.
- the output signal processing unit 2003 includes a D / A converter for converting a digital signal into an analog signal, and a decoder for decoding from a video format such as MPEG-2, and outputs video and audio to the TV 45.
- the system control unit 2004 includes a setting information processing unit 2011 that controls the operation of the recorder 2000 and switches the setting of the recorder 2000.
- the setting information processing unit 2011 will be described in detail later.
- the memory 2005 stores a recorder ID 2012 which is identification information of the recorder 2000, and setting information 2013 which is setting information of the recorder 2000.
- the operation input unit 2006 receives an input by a user operation from a remote control or a button on the front panel (not shown).
- the communication unit 2007 connects to the server 42 by the Internet, a LAN, or the like.
- the HDD 2008 is an area for recording the recorded content and the content list obtained from the input signal processing unit 2002.
- An optical disc drive 2009 is a drive for recording and reproducing an optical disc such as a DVD or Blu-ray Disc.
- the optical disc drive 2009 records the recorded content and content list obtained from the input signal processing unit 2002, and contains an optical disc containing video and music content. Play.
- the input signal processing unit 2002, the output signal processing unit 2003, the system control unit 2004, the HDD 2008, and the optical disk drive 2009 of the recorder 2000 are mutually connected via a bus 2010.
- the setting information processing unit 2011 responds to the setting information 2013 stored in the memory 2005, according to the display setting of the menu screen of the recorder 2000, the recording / reproduction mode setting, the chapter setting of the recording content, the preference of the user, etc. Make settings such as program recommendation. Specifically, for example, when an identifier indicating “menu screen background color: black” or the like stored in the setting information 2013 is read and a menu screen output request to the output signal processing unit 2003 is made, the background color is set. Outputs an instruction to display in "black”.
- the setting information 2013 may be stored in the HDD 2008 or an external recording unit such as an SD card (not shown).
- setting information such as chapters on recorded content stored in the HDD 2008, information with a large size, and the like are information that is efficient when stored in the HDD 2008.
- the setting information 2013 is already set at the time of device purchase or is set by a user operation from the operation input unit 2006, but in the present invention, the information obtained from the RF-ID reader / writer 46 in the present invention. It can be changed based on
- FIG. 78 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an RF-ID card for changing settings of the recorder 2000 by reading by the RF-ID reader / writer 46 of the recorder 2000.
- the RF-ID card 2100 includes a memory 2101, an antenna 21, a power supply unit 91, a data reception unit 105, a data transfer unit 108, a processing unit 2102, a recording unit 106, and a reproduction unit 107.
- Information such as data recording and reproduction from the RF-ID reader / writer 46 is received by the data receiving unit 105 and sent to the processing unit 2102.
- the processing unit 2102 records data in the memory 2101 by the recording unit 106 and reproduces data from the memory 2101 by the reproduction unit 107.
- the data transfer unit 108 transmits the data transmitted from the processing unit 2102 to the RF-ID reader / writer 46 via the antenna 21.
- the memory 2101 stores a UID 75, media identification information 111, and device operation information 2103.
- the UID 75 and the media identification information 111 are information used for identification of the RF-ID card 2100.
- the UID 75 is a unique ID of the RF-ID card 2100.
- an identifier of being a card is recorded.
- the device operation information 2103 stores information on a device to be operated using the RF-ID card 2100 and information on the operation of the device.
- the operation device identification information 2104 stores information indicating the type of the device to be operated.
- the stored information uses the same identifier as the media identification information 111, and in FIG. 78, an identifier of being a recorder is recorded.
- the target device information 2105 stores information used when it is desired to perform an operation only on a specific device, and in FIG. 78, a recorder ID 2012 which is identification information of the recorder 2000 is stored.
- a recorder ID 2012 which is identification information of the recorder 2000 is stored.
- the operation device identification information 2104 and the target device information 2105 are included in the device operation information 2103. It does not have to be.
- the setting information processing unit 2011 is configured to change the setting by a card, the media identification information 111 may not be included in the memory 2101.
- the operation instruction information 2106 is information indicating the contents of the operation performed on the device.
- information 2109 indicating setting change
- information 2110 indicating an object to change the setting
- operation instruction information 2106 is not limited to information for one operation, and may be information on a plurality of operations, or may be a program combining a plurality of operations.
- the communication information 2107 is information on a server or the like that accesses when instructed to communicate and acquire by the operation instruction information 2106.
- a URL 2112, a login ID 2113, and a password 2114 are stored.
- the IP address may be recorded instead of the URL 2112, and when accessing another device in an in-house or home network, information specifying the device such as a MAC address may be recorded. .
- step 2201 when receiving an input from the operation input unit 2006 by the user, the setting information processing unit 2011 requests the output signal processing unit 2003 to output a message to the TV 45, and displays “RF-ID” on the screen of the TV 45. "Please hold the card” is displayed. The display of the message may be displayed on a console (not shown) of the recorder 2000.
- authentication such as a password or biometric authentication may be requested, and after authentication, the process may shift to registration processing.
- the message processing after step 2203 may be performed by holding the RF-ID card 2100 over the RF-ID reader / writer 46 when using the recorder 2000 without outputting a message to the TV 45.
- an inquiry message as to whether or not the setting information 2013 is to be registered may be displayed, and registration may be performed in the place selected by the user.
- the setting information 2013 may be registered in the RF-ID card 2200, or registration may be performed in a server different from the server 42.
- step 2203 When the RF-ID card is detected in step 2203, mutual authentication processing is performed.
- step 2204 If the authentication determination in step 2204 is OK, the process proceeds to step 2205 to continue the process. If the authentication determination is NG, the process returns to step 2202 to repeat the RF-ID card detection process.
- step 2205 the UID information 75 is acquired from the memory 2101 of the RF-ID card 2100.
- step 2206 the communication information 2107 is acquired from the memory 2101 of the RF-ID card 2100. If communication information is not registered in the memory 2101 of the RF-ID card 2100, the user may be requested to input communication information. When a registration instruction to a location not registered in the RF-ID card 2100 is issued in step 2201, nothing is performed in this step. Further, when a plurality of pieces of communication information 2107 are registered in the RF-ID card 2100, the user may make a selection by displaying the communication information as a list.
- the recorder ID 2012 and the setting information 2013 are acquired from the memory 2005.
- the setting information may not be current information, but may be information input by the user at the time of setting registration and the like.
- step 2208 the setting information processing unit 2011 issues, to the communication unit 2007, a request for accessing the URL 2112 of the communication information 2107.
- the URL 2112 is accessed, the login ID 2113 and the password 2114 are used.
- step 2209 it is determined whether the access is successful or not. If the access is successful, the process proceeds to step 2210 to continue the process. If the access is unsuccessful, the process is terminated.
- step 2210 the UID information 75, the recorder ID 2012 acquired from the memory 2005, and the setting information 2013 are transmitted to the server 42.
- step 2211 operation instruction information 2106 is generated from the operation designated in 2201 and the storage position of the selected setting information 2013, the setting information 2013 acquired in step 2207, and the communication information 2107 acquired in step 2206.
- step 2212 the same processing as in step 2202 is performed, and a message “Please hold the RF-ID card” is displayed on the screen of the TV 45.
- step 2213 when the RF-ID card is detected, mutual authentication processing is performed.
- step 2214 If the authentication determination in step 2214 is OK, the process proceeds to step 2215 to continue the process, and if the authentication determination is NG, the process returns to step 2212 to repeat the RF-ID card detection process.
- step 2215 UID information is acquired from the memory 2101 of the RF-ID card 2100.
- step 2216 it is checked whether the UID information 75 acquired in step 2205 matches the UID information acquired in step 2215. If they coincide, the process proceeds to step 2217 to continue the process, and when they do not coincide, the step It returns to 2211 and repeats the RF-ID card detection processing.
- step 2217 the control device identification information 2104 (not shown) stored in the memory 2005, the recorder ID 2012, the operation instruction information 2106 generated in step 2211, and the communication information 2107 are transmitted to the RF-ID card 2100. Record to and complete the process.
- the setting information 2250 is registered in association with the UID information 75 and the target device information 2105, and specifically, an identifier indicating information such as “menu screen background color: black” is registered. “A” and “B” at the end of each setting information indicate that the settings are different.
- UID0001 it is also possible to register a plurality of setting information for one UID, and as in the case of the item of REC-0001, the target device information 2105 corresponds to a plurality of UIDs with respect to one target device information.
- the associated setting information may be registered.
- the setting information may include change target information 2110.
- UID 0001 is recorded as the UID information 75
- card is recorded as the media identification information 111.
- a set of operation device identification information 2104, target device information 2105, operation instruction information 2106, and communication information 2107 is registered.
- the communication information 2107 may be registered as information unrelated to other information. For example, when one piece of communication information is registered and the RF-ID card 2100 is used, access to the same server or the like may always be performed.
- the operation instruction information 2106 includes instruction content information 2260, instruction target information 2261, and communication execution information 2262.
- the instruction content information 2260 an identifier indicating a process to be executed for the device designated by the target device information 2105 is recorded.
- the instruction target information 2261 is, for example, for REC-0001 as an operation target.
- An identifier indicating the setting of the menu screen mode, the recording mode, etc. is recorded.
- the communication execution information 2262 an identifier indicating whether or not to perform communication when processing the instruction content information 2260 is recorded.
- the device operation information 2103 may be configured of only the communication information 2107.
- communication execution information 2262 when communication execution information 2262 is designated to perform communication, a URL of a server or the like that performs communication, a login ID, a password, and the like are recorded.
- FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a procedure of updating setting information 2013 using the information of the RF-ID card 2100 by the setting information processing unit 2011 of the recorder 2000.
- step 2303 If the determination in step 2303 is OK, the process proceeds to step 2304 to continue the process, and if the determination is NG, the process ends.
- step 2304 UID information 75 and device operation information 2103 are acquired from the memory 2101 of the RF-ID card 2100.
- step 2305 the control device identification information 2104 included in the device operation information 2103 is searched, and is compared with the non-illustrated device identification information acquired from the memory 2005 of the recorder 2000.
- step 2306 if the comparison result in step 2305 matches, the process proceeds to step 2307 to continue the process, and if not, the process proceeds to step 2314.
- step 2314 it is determined whether or not all the operating device identification information 2104 has been searched, and if all the operating device identification information 2104 is searched, the processing ends.
- step 2307 the target device information 2105 is retrieved and compared with the recorder ID 2012 acquired from the memory 2005 of the recorder 2000.
- step 2308 if the comparison result in step 2307 is in agreement, the process proceeds to step 2309 to continue the process, and in the case of incoincidence, the process is terminated.
- step 2309 operation instruction information 2106 corresponding to the device operation information 2103 and the target device information 2105 is acquired.
- step 2310 communication information 2107 corresponding to the device operation information 2103 and the target device information 2105 is acquired.
- step 2311 setting change processing is acquired from the instruction content information 2260 of the operation instruction information 2106, and the server 42 is accessed to acquire the setting information 2250.
- the processing of this step will be described in detail later using FIG.
- step 2312 it is determined whether the setting information 2250 can be correctly acquired. If the setting information 2250 can be correctly acquired, the process proceeds to step 2313 and the setting information processing unit 2011 updates the setting information 2013 of the memory 2005 of the recorder 2000. The process ends, and if it can not be acquired correctly, the process ends.
- FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing a procedure for the setting information processing unit 2011 to access the server 42 and acquire the setting information 2250.
- step 2351 the communication unit 2007 accesses the URL 2112 included in the communication information 2107.
- step 2352 the setting information processing unit 2011 transmits the login ID 2113 and the password 2114 included in the communication information 2107 to the communication unit 2007, and performs login processing.
- step 2353 If it is determined in step 2353 that the authentication is OK, the process proceeds to step 2354 to continue the processing, and if it is determined that the authentication is NG, the process ends as an acquisition failure of the setting information 2250.
- step 2354 the UID information of the server 42 is searched, and in step 2355, if there is any that matches the UID information 75 acquired in step 2304 of FIG. 82, the process proceeds to step 2356 to continue the process and match If there is nothing left, the process proceeds to step 2354 to repeat the search for UID information until it is determined in step 2359 that all the UID information has been searched. If it is determined in step 2359 that all UID information has been searched, the processing ends as acquisition failure of the setting information 2250.
- step 2356 target device information corresponding to the UID information 75 is searched, and in step 2357, if there is any that matches the target device information 2105 acquired in step 2305 of FIG. 82, the processing proceeds to step 2358. Continuing, if there is no match, the process proceeds to step 2354 to repeat the search of the target device information until it is determined in step 2360 that all the target device information has been searched. If it is determined in step 2360 that all the target device information has been searched, the processing ends as an acquisition failure of the setting information 2250.
- step 2258 the setting information 2250 corresponding to the UID information 75 and the target device information 2105 is acquired, and the process is ended.
- the use of the RF-ID card 2100 makes it possible to set the recorder 2000 without the user being aware of complicated processing, which is easy even for a user who is not familiar with the operation of the device.
- the effect of being able to change the setting of the recorder can be obtained.
- the operation that can be performed on the recorder is not only changing the setting, but, for example, when acquisition of the recorded content list is specified in the instruction content information, the recorded content list of the recorder is registered on the RF-ID or server. It also becomes possible to refer from other devices.
- the RF-ID card shown in FIG. 84 it is possible to perform scheduled recording only by holding the RF-ID card.
- reservation recording is performed without accessing the server by performing reservation recording with the settings of “program ID” and “recording mode” specified in the instruction target information.
- the “program code” specified in the instruction target information is specified, and the program ID or the start time and end time, channel information is acquired from the server, It is possible to perform scheduled recording by setting the "recording mode”.
- “recommended program” in the instruction target information and acquiring the program ID from the server, it is possible to acquire recommended content from the server and perform scheduled recording.
- a service may be considered in which an RF-ID card is used as an appendix of a program guide magazine to reduce the time and effort of scheduled recording.
- the RF is distributed for free -A service may be considered in which the content with a limited function is tested on an ID card and a user who likes it makes a purchase.
- the initial display channel immediately after the power is turned on the setting of the initial volume, the child lock setting excluding adult broadcasts and violence scenes, etc.
- the channel zapping setting of, the contrast and brightness setting of the screen, the language setting, the continuous use time setting and the like can be registered as change target information, and the setting according to the usability of the user can be performed.
- the car navigation system car navigation system
- "highlight” is specified in the instruction content information
- "landmark information" is specified in the instruction target information.
- the landmark information may be acquired from a server.
- a recommended land such as distributing an RF-ID card recording device operation information shown in FIG. 85 in a service area, an interchange, a tourist spot, etc. of an expressway, and an event is currently being performed. It becomes possible to use also for uses, such as highlighting a mark.
- the notebook PC is equipped with a reader / writer for an RF-ID card and a setting information processing unit, the screen resolution, the arrangement of icons on the desktop, etc., startup settings such as wallpaper, screensavers and resident software, peripheral devices used, mouse Etc.
- the game machine is equipped with a reader / writer for an RF-ID card and a setting information processing unit.
- a reader / writer for an RF-ID card for which setting change is set as instruction content information Can be set, and saved data can be read.
- a service may be considered in which an RF-ID card in which download is set as instruction content information is used as an appendix of a magazine or the like, and additional scenarios or rare items are downloaded.
- the RF-ID card of the present invention registers in the RF-ID card, for example, the setting of the air-conditioner temperature and the bath boiling temperature according to personal preference even when home appliances in the home are connected by the network, Setting up home appliances by holding it over an RF-ID reader / writer equipped in the home at one time, or browsing operations for food stored in a refrigerator are registered in the RF-ID card, and attached to food in advance Use in various applications, such as checking the food list with a TV reader / writer, by acquiring information on food registered in the memory of the refrigerator with tags etc. and images taken with the camera in the refrigerator It is possible.
- An RF-ID card for example, four types of cards indicating “heating”, “cooling”, “stove”, and “fan" specifying an apparatus and an RF-ID card (for example, specifying an apparatus setting) A combination of “weak”, “medium”, “strong” three types of cards) etc., or a plurality of RF tags having the respective functions of device specification and device setting specification on one RF-ID card In order to prepare for, you may customize the setting of the device.
- the device ID of the user B's TV and the user B are the methods by which the user B browses the photograph taken by the user A
- the information (referred to as device generation information B) generated from an RF-ID (RF tag B) in which the URL of the relay server owned by B is stored in advance is transmitted to user A by e-mail etc.
- User A stores the URL of the server where the photo is registered in the relay server in association with the device generation information B, so that the user B simply holds the RF tag B over the RF-ID reader / writer of the TV. It is possible to view the photo taken by A.
- the mail address of the user A is registered in advance in the tag B, and the user A writes the device generation information B in the tag B only by holding the tag B over the RF-ID reader / writer of the TV.
- notification of the device generation information B is automatically performed, it is possible to exchange photographs even when the user B is not familiar with how to use the device.
- by transmitting a postcard in which at least one of the URL, login ID, and password is encrypted by the device generation information B and the user A registers a postcard registered with the RF-ID the viewing of photos can be restricted to the user B's TV. It is possible.
- the user A sends a postcard with two RF-IDs, an RF-ID for transmission and an RF-ID for reply, to the user B, the user A prepares itself as the RF-ID for reply in advance.
- the device generation information A generated from the TV etc. of the user B
- the URL of the server for which the user B registers a picture when the user B replies the login ID and the password are encrypted with the device generation information A
- the user B can associate with the device generation information A and register it, so that it is possible to restrict the device which permits the user B to view the registered photograph.
- the shipment unique ID of the RF-ID attached to the shipment may be a combination of a group ID unit common to a plurality of shipments and a unique ID unit set for each shipment. .
- the server's picture instead of associating the server's picture with the entire mailing list unique ID, by registering it in association with the group ID part, when sending an postcard with an RF-ID associated with the picture to multiple subjects, It is possible to omit the trouble of registering the ID.
- the server picture registered in association with the group ID part may be switched between browsing permission / prohibition according to the unique ID part.
- the address book and the unique ID may be provided by providing an RF-ID reader / writer on the printer and reading the unique ID portion of the mailed unique ID at the time of printing. It becomes possible to associate the copies, and it is possible to manage permission / prohibition of photo browsing on the server in the address book.
- a plurality of RF tags with different functions may be provided on a postcard or a card, and communication of an unused RF tag may be blocked to switch a plurality of functions with one postcard or card.
- an RF tag having a function of displaying a slide show at the top of the postcard and an RF tag having a function of reproducing an image at the bottom either the top or the bottom of the postcard can be an RF-ID reader / writer It is possible to switch between the photo display function and the video playback function by approaching to.
- it may be provided on the front and back of the postcard, or may be provided with a lid using a material for blocking communication so that only the RF tag in a state in which the lid is opened can be used.
- the photos may be registered in a plurality of servers, and the URLs of the respective servers may be stored in the RF tag to access the respective servers to acquire the photos and display a list.
- the RF-ID reader / writer may be provided not only in the device but also in input means for performing device operations such as a remote control.
- an RF-ID reader / writer may be provided as input means for centrally operating the plurality of devices, and the respective devices may be operated.
- an input means such as a remote control may be provided with a personal authentication means such as fingerprint authentication or face authentication or biometric authentication such as a password, and reading and writing of the RF tag may be performed only when the personal authentication is completed.
- personal authentication information may be recorded on an RF tag, and personal authentication may be performed using an RF tag, such as a device or a remote control.
- RF-ID refers in a narrow sense to "tags with identification information stored in non-volatile memory", and RF-IDs with dual interface and security functions have terms such as "IC card” It seems to be used.
- the RF-ID in the present specification is not limited to the narrow sense term.
- the term “electronic circuit which can record individual identification information in a non-volatile memory and can transmit individual identification information to the outside through an antenna” is used in a broad sense.
- the seller, repairer or serviceman of the device visits the place where the target device is located, or performs setting remotely or operates the target device. I needed it. That is, even in the case of remote control, it was necessary to go to a large area for setting of remote control.
- using the RF-ID card 2100 enables the user to set the recorder 2000 without being aware of complicated processing, and even a user who is not familiar with the operation of the device The effect is obtained that it is possible to easily change the settings of the recorder.
- the present invention relates to a communication system including a device having a screen, a reader device connected to the device via a communication channel, and a communication device for performing close proximity wireless communication with the reader device. Or a program stored in the communication device along with identification information of the communication device, executed by a virtual machine provided in a device that performs proximity wireless communication with the communication device. Accessing a server device described in the following code and connected via a communication network, and downloading from the server device an image corresponding to the identification information among the images stored in the accessed server device; Displaying the downloaded image, or a program including such a program Beam can also be implemented as a computer-readable recording medium such as recorded CD-ROM.
- the communication device may be any device provided with identification information and an RF-ID storing a program for a virtual machine, for example, electronic devices such as cameras, household appliances such as rice cookers and refrigerators, everyday items such as toothbrushes Needless to say, it can be applied.
- FIGS. 86 (a) and (b) an embodiment in the case where an RF-ID reader is mounted on a remote control such as a TV is shown using the block diagrams of FIGS. 86 (a) and (b), the flowchart of FIG. 86 (c) and the flowchart of FIG. explain.
- the slave communication device 5050 such as a camera has the memory 52 and the antenna 21.
- the antenna 5063 of the remote controller 5051 When the antenna 5063 of the remote controller 5051 is brought close to the antenna 21, power is supplied from the antenna 5063 to the antenna 21, and data in the memory 52 is sent from the antenna 21 to the antenna 5063.
- the data is converted into digital data by the communication circuit 5064 and stored in the memory 5061 (step 5001a: FIG. 87).
- the transmitter of remote control 5051 is directed to TV 45 and transmission switch 5062 is pressed (step 5001b)
- the data of memory 5061 is sent to light emitting / receiving unit 5058 of TV using light through light output unit 5062, and the parent of TV etc. It is transmitted to the device 45 (step 5001c).
- the communication here may be wireless instead of light.
- parent device version information 5059 and n1 indicating the language type and version of the parent machine such as a virtual machine language are recorded in the parent device 45 such as a TV (step 5060i: FIG. 86C).
- slave unit version information 5052, n2 indicating the version of the language of the program of the slave unit is first recorded. After that, there is a program area 5053, and the programs 5056a, 5056b, 5056c of the versions 5055a, 5055b, 5055c are recorded, and the data area 5054 is next.
- step 5060i of the flowchart of FIG. 86 the version information n1 of the master unit 45 is obtained, the version information n2 in the memory of the slave unit is obtained (step 5060a), and the program n of the maximum value of n1 n n2 is selected (Ste 5060b), the execution program n is executed (step 5060c), and if there is a connection to the Internet in step 5060d, the server is connected in step 5060e and language information 5065 set in the master unit 45 is sent to the server (Step 5060f), in response to the sent language information 5065, the server sends the program in the language, for example, French, to the parent machine for execution. Or you may run the program on a server.
- the server is connected in step 5060e and language information 5065 set in the master unit 45 is sent to the server (Step 5060f), in response to the sent language information 5065, the server sends the program in the language, for example, French, to the parent machine for execution. Or you may run the program on
- step 5060h If not connected to the Internet, the process returns to step 5060h, executes the local program, and displays attribute information of the child device 5050, for example, information indicating the case of failure or information such as the number of recorded photos on the screen of the parent device 45 indicate.
- the version information 5052 is recorded in the memory 52 of the slave unit, and the programs, procedures, and URLs of each generation that evolve in a cycle of 10 years are recorded for each version, so the same after 20 years and 30 years There is an effect of operating in the format.
- 86 (a) shows an example of recording the version and generation of a program, but as shown in FIG.
- the address of data in the server such as the URL corresponding to the versions 5055d, 5055e, 5055f, URL 5057a
- the same effect can be obtained by recording 5057b and 5057c.
- backward compatibility can be realized in the future. For example, if an RF-ID is loaded on a product bought this year, assuming that the version is 1, JAVA (registered trademark) corresponding to, for example, versions 1, 2, and 3 can be applied to parent device 45 after 20 years and 30 years. Since a program such as a virtual machine language is listed, by knowing the slave device version information 5052, the master device switches to the program of the master device corresponding to that version.
- step 5001 a When the reading switch 5063 of the remote control 5051 is pressed in step 5001 a and brought close to the antenna 21 of the slave unit 5050, data of the memory 52 of the slave unit is stored in the memory 5061 of the remote control 5051.
- step 5001b the remote control 5051 is directed to the master 45 such as a TV, and the transmission switch 5062 is pressed (step 5001b), whereby the data of the memory 5061 is sent to the master by light (step 5001c).
- this data is called tag data for the sake of convenience.
- the execution program is extracted or selected from the tag data (step 5001 d), the extracted or selected execution program is executed using the virtual machine language of the parent machine (step 5001 e), and the Internet connection identification information on the parent machine side is read (step 5001 e) Step 5001 f), if the identification information does not indicate “connectable to the Internet” up to step 5001, execute the program for non-connection time in the execution program (step 5001 t) and execute the execution result of the screen of the parent machine It displays (step 5001 u).
- the present invention not only the information for connecting to the Internet but also the execution program operating at the time of disconnection is recorded in the memory 52, so that the minimum operation required at the time of disconnection can be displayed.
- connection program including a part of the program is executed (step 5001h).
- the execution program in the tab data is generated by adding the data such as the URL of the server, user ID, password, etc. to the data area 5054 of FIG. 86 (a) to the execution program in the tag data to generate a connection program.
- the memory can be expanded and the capacity of the non-volatile memory in the memory 52 can be reduced.
- the chip area and the cost can be reduced by recording the connection program of the memory 52 in the unrewritable memory such as the ROM memory of the program area 5053 and recording the URL of the server in the rewritable data area 5054. be able to.
- step 5001i a connection is made to a server of a specific URL, and it is determined in step 5001j whether the server side requests uploading of data. If Yes, data or / and a program are uploaded to the server in step 5001p.
- the program is executed by the server using this data (step 5001 q), the result executed by the server is sent to the parent device (step 5001 r), and the result etc. is displayed on the surface of the parent device (step 5001 s).
- step 5001j in the case of No, the information including the specific program in the URL of the server is downloaded (step 5001k), and this downloaded program is executed on the parent device (step 5001m). Then, the result is displayed on the screen of the parent device.
- a large program may be executed on the server, or a program downloaded from the server may be executed, and these fall within the scope of the present invention.
- the remote control includes a button for switching the battery and the TV channel, an antenna for reading the RF-ID, a communication circuit, and an infrared light emitting unit. Similar effects can be obtained by using a mobile phone instead of the remote control. It is easy to introduce because it can share the infrared light emitting part etc. which are installed in the mobile phone. There is no change in performance because it is directly connected to the server because it has a portable communication line. However, communication costs are incurred, which places a burden on the user. The screen of a mobile phone is by far smaller than a TV. Therefore, by providing the transmission switch 5062 shown in FIG.
- the tag data in the memory 52 described above is sent directly to the TV. Data can be viewed on a large screen with high resolution. In addition, since there is no cost, the user has a great advantage. Communication via the mobile telephone line using the read tag data is interrupted in conjunction with this transmission switch.
- a reader unit of RF-ID (may be an NFC communication unit) is provided in the mobile phone.
- RF-ID may be an NFC communication unit
- a terminal device having an RFID tag such as the photographing device 1 described in the first to seventh embodiments
- a communication device provided with an RF-ID reader / writer such as the TV 45
- a communication device via a general-purpose network such as the server 42 Is a system having the same configuration as a server communicably connected to the server.
- an external device having an RFID is caused to touch an external device having an RFID by causing a TV remote controller or a mobile telephone terminal provided with an RF-ID reader / writer, and external device information indicating information of the external device including an ID etc.
- the communication apparatus reads (pairs) its own communication apparatus information to the read external apparatus information and transfers it to the server.
- the external device information can be linked to the communication device information and registered in the database on the server. This is particularly effective when the user of the external device completes the user registration of the external device with one touch using a communication device such as a portable terminal.
- the external device information is, for example, a serial number (guarantee number) of the external device, and an e-mail address etc.
- the communication device information is set in the communication device.
- the communication device produces the external device with one touch.
- the number can be read, linked with the e-mail address registered in itself, and registered in the server database. In this way, the patron registration of the external device can be simplified.
- FIG. 88 is a system block diagram in the eighth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 88, the system disclosed in the present embodiment is a system similar to that of the first to seventh embodiments as described above, and is configured of an external device 8001, a communication device 8002 and a server 8003.
- the external device 8001 of this embodiment includes, for example, household appliances such as a microwave, a washing machine, a refrigerator, a television, a recorder, and the like in addition to the terminal device such as the imaging device 1 described in the first to seventh embodiments.
- AV home appliances AV home appliances.
- the external device 8001 may be a book or food. Basically, any device that can communicate with the reader / writer by passive / active RFID or NFC (Near Field Communication) may be used.
- the communication device 8002 of this embodiment is, for example, a mobile phone terminal or a mobile device in addition to the communication device such as the TV 45 described in the first to seventh embodiments.
- the communication device 8002 may be any device provided with a reader / writer that can be updated with the RFID of the external device 8001 or NFC, but a portable device is desirable.
- the server 8003 according to the present embodiment is, for example, a server connected via a general-purpose network with the communication apparatus, similarly to the server 42 according to the first to seventh embodiments.
- Server 8003 according to the present embodiment has at least database 8839, and has a function of performing registration in database 8839 based on the information (registration information) transmitted from communication device 8802.
- each of the external device 8001, the communication device 8002, and the server 8003 is also characterized in the configuration.
- the system which connected these also has a feature.
- the external device 8001 includes a CPU 8802, a second memory 52, a first encryption unit 8803, a modulation / demodulation unit 8804, a power induction unit 8805 (having the same function as the second power supply unit 91) and proximity wireless Of the antenna 8806.
- the CPU 8802 is a system control unit of the external device 8001 and operates with the power induced by the power induction unit 8805 or with a battery or other power supply (not shown).
- the second memory 52 has the same configuration as that of the second memory 52 of the first to seventh embodiments, and the same reference numerals are given to the second memory 52 and the description is omitted. Also in the second memory 52, at least the UID (such as the serial number of the external device) that can be identified by the external device 8001 is stored in the second memory 52 in the second memory 52. For example, if the external device 8001 has a function of collecting the usage history of the external device 8001 or a function of detecting a failure, usage history information of the external device 8001 or an error code indicating a failure that has occurred And so on. This corresponds to (corresponds to) the photographed image status information 55 in the photographing apparatus 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments. Therefore, all the information stored in the second memory 52 shown in FIG. 4 such as server specifying information for specifying the server 8003 is included.
- the first encryption unit 8803 transmits the information (content) recorded in the second memory 52 to the communication device 8002 via (proximity) wireless communication, it is possible to prevent eavesdropping and tampering on the transmission path.
- the purpose is to encrypt the contents of the second memory 52.
- the first encryption key is used for encryption.
- the first encryption key may be a public key or a secret key.
- the modem unit 8804 is a part that performs modulation / demodulation when communicating with the communication apparatus 8002 by close proximity wireless communication.
- the modem unit 8804 modulates and outputs the communication content.
- the received communication content is demodulated.
- Power induction unit 8805 is a portion that induces electric power from radio waves by electromagnetic induction in order to perform close proximity wireless communication from communication apparatus 8002. Note that another component of the external device 8001 may be operated by the power generated by electromagnetic induction.
- An antenna 8806 is a loop antenna for performing near-field wireless communication.
- RFID and NFC in the HF band using the 15.56 MHz band are assumed, but the present invention is not limited to that frequency band. It may be in the UHF band of 900 Mz to 1 GHz, or may exceed 2 GHz.
- the purpose is to easily register the user of the external device 8001, so that the second memory 52 stores a UID that can identify the external device 8001 for each device.
- the second memory 52 includes information that can identify the maker of the external device 8001, information that can identify the manufacturing date, and information that can identify the manufacturing process (factory, line, lot, person in charge of manufacturing), and the like. Is desirable.
- the second memory 52 include server identification information 48 for the communication device 8002 to easily access different servers for each manufacturer of the external device 8001.
- the communication device 8802 can connect to servers of different manufacturers for each external device 8001 without performing complicated processing. As a result, cost reduction of the communication device 8002 can be expected.
- communication apparatus 8002 is CPU 8807, antenna 8808, modulation / demodulation unit (proximity wireless communication unit) 8809, output switching unit 8810, modulation / demodulation switching unit 8811, registration information generation unit 8812, device information Storage unit 8813, input unit 8820, key 8821, external device information memory 8822, second encryption unit 8823, access control information generation unit 8824, server information storage unit 8825, server communication unit 8830, IP (Internet Protocol) communication information storage unit It comprises an 8831 and a display portion 8842.
- modulation / demodulation unit proximity wireless communication unit
- output switching unit 8810 output switching unit 8810
- modulation / demodulation switching unit 8811 registration information generation unit 8812
- device information Storage unit 8813 input unit 8820, key 8821, external device information memory 8822, second encryption unit 8823, access control information generation unit 8824, server information storage unit 8825, server communication unit 8830, IP
- the CPU 8807 is a system controller of the communication apparatus 8002 and is a part that manages the operation of each component.
- the antenna 8808 corresponds to an antenna unit according to the present invention, is a functional element paired with the antenna 8806 of the external device 8001, and is a portion that communicates with the external device 8001 by close proximity wireless communication.
- the modulation / demodulation unit 8809 corresponds to the proximity wireless communication unit according to the present invention, and performs modulation / demodulation of the proximity wireless communication channel with the external device 8001.
- the information (for example, external device information) output from the external device 8001 is demodulated here, and the information output to the external device 8001 is modulated here.
- the modulation method or the demodulation method corresponds to a plurality of methods such as high-speed high-output and low-speed low-output, and the details are as described in the first embodiment and thus the description thereof is omitted.
- the output switching unit 8810 is one of the characteristic parts of this embodiment and is included in the antenna unit according to the present invention.
- the output switching unit 8810 is a part that switches the output of the radio wave signal output from the antenna 8808. For example, when the distance between the communication device 8002 and the external device 8001 is long and communication can not be stably performed, the output switching unit 8810 increases the output of the radio wave signal output from the antenna 8808. In addition, when the distance between the communication device 8002 and the external device 8001 is short, the output switching unit 8810 maintains a low power also to avoid interference of a radio signal output from the antenna 8808 with another device.
- the external device 8801 is provided with, for example, a communication radio wave intensity measurement unit to check the voltage value of the induced power and the size of the output of the communication radio wave itself, and output it to the communication device 8802 to the external device 8801 Send a switch command.
- the output switching unit 8810 of the communication device 8002 changes the signal strength output from the antenna 8808 by receiving this. Further, information indicating the power supply level of the power source induced by the external device 8001 such as the voltage value of the induced power or the output of the communication radio wave itself may be included in the external device information and transmitted.
- the modulation / demodulation switching unit 8811 is included in the proximity wireless communication unit according to the present invention, and is a part that switches between high-speed and low-speed modulation schemes. As a result, for example, when the distance between the communication apparatus 802 and the external device 8001 is long and the communication quality is poor, the communication reliability can be ensured by dropping at low speed. Note that it is desirable that switching between modulation and demodulation be performed in response to a request from the external device 8001. In that case, the external device 8801 is provided with, for example, a communication radio wave intensity measurement unit to check the voltage value of the induced electric power and the magnitude of the output of the communication radio wave itself. Send a modulation / demodulation switching command.
- the modulation / demodulation switching unit 8811 of the communication apparatus 8002 changes the modulation method of the communication path of the close proximity wireless communication with the external device 8001.
- information indicating the power supply level of the power source induced by the external device 8001 such as the voltage value of the induced power or the output of the communication radio wave itself may be included in the external device information and transmitted.
- the switching of the modulation scheme is described in detail in Embodiment 1, and thus the detailed description is omitted here.
- the external device ID storage unit 8850 stores an external device ID capable of identifying the external device 8001 for each external device 8001 obtained by close proximity wireless communication with the external device 8001. Also, the external device ID storage unit 8850 stores the output of the radio wave that has been communicable and the modulation method in association with the external device ID. As a result, low-speed, high-power and safe reading of only small external device ID is performed, and usage history information of the external device can be read at high-speed and low output whether or not it can be stored in the external device ID storage unit 8850 It becomes possible to control according to the content. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress switching of the radio wave output and the modulation scheme each time the external device 8001 is accessed.
- the external device ID storage unit 8850 is provided, and the communication status with the external device 8001 that has once communicated is stored, and adjustment is made each time access is made by using this. By doing this, it is possible to implement high-speed close proximity wireless communication as a whole.
- high-speed close proximity wireless communication is realized as a whole by switching the output switching unit 8810 and the modulation / demodulation switching unit 8811 according to the storage content of the external device ID storage unit 8850.
- the external device ID storage unit 8850 may be physically included in the device information storage unit 8813. In this case, a partial area of the device information storage unit 8813 is exclusively assigned as the external device ID storage unit 8850. Just do it.
- the registration information generation unit 8812 corresponds to a registration information generation unit according to the present invention.
- the registration information generation unit 8812 adds the communication device information of the own device stored in the device information storage unit 8813 to the external device information received from the external device 8801, and transmits information (registration information) to be transmitted to the server 8003. It is a part to generate.
- communication device information to be added to the external device information is stored in the device information storage unit 8813, and includes communication device identification information 8814 and user information 8815.
- the communication device identification information 8814 is identification information capable of uniquely identifying the communication device 8002.
- the communication device identification information 8814 is different from a MAC address or an IP address for communication control.
- identification information of a SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card or RFID reader / writer control installed in the mobile phone terminal The identification information set for each application and the serial number or serial number of the communication device 8002 correspond to this.
- the user information 8815 is information that can identify the user of the communication apparatus 8002.
- the user information 8815 includes, for example, a telephone number 8816, a mail address 8817, user identification information 8818, and a zip code 8819 (which may be specified as an address, of course).
- the input unit 8820 is an input unit that registers communication device information in the device information storage unit 8813 using the key 8821 or the like. Insertion of a SIM card of a mobile phone terminal or the like corresponds to this.
- the external device information memory 8822 is a memory for temporarily storing external device information transmitted from the external device 8001 via close proximity wireless communication.
- the external device information memory 8822 adds communication apparatus information to the stored external device information as a work memory of the registration information generation unit 8812 and generates transmission information to be transmitted to the server 8003.
- the registration information generation unit 8812 generate the registration information by specifying the communication device information as parent (main, trunk) information and the external device information as child (sub, branch) information. This is because it is possible to reduce the load on the server side by registering communication device information as a parent and external device information as a child in a database 8839 of the server 8003 described later.
- the second encryption unit 8823 is a portion that encrypts the transmission information (registration information) to the server 8003 generated by the registration information generation unit 8812. Note that as the encryption key used in the second encryption unit 8823, a second encryption key different from the first encryption key used in the first encryption unit 8803 of the external device 8001 is used.
- the purpose of the first encryption unit 8803 to darken is twofold.
- the first point is to prevent eavesdropping and tampering of external device information transmitted from the external device 8001 in close proximity wireless communication between the external device 8001 and the communication device 8002.
- the second point is to prevent the external device information itself transmitted from the external device 8001 from being viewed in the communication apparatus 8002.
- the external device information of the external device 8001 manufactured by A company is read by the communication device 800 manufactured by B company, usage history information of the external device 8001 manufactured by A company etc.
- the data may be read out and analyzed by the communication device 8002 of FIG. Therefore, by encrypting the external device information of the external device 8001 manufactured by company A in the external device 8001, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the external device information may be read out from the communication device 8002 manufactured by company B. .
- the purpose of encryption by the second encryption unit 8823 is to prevent the transmission information (registration information) from being intercepted or falsified in communication with the server 8003.
- the external device information is subjected to the first encryption in the external device 8001, and further subjected to the second encryption in the communication device 8002 to be information of double encryption, and transmitted to the server 8003. It will be done.
- the second encryption key may be a secret key that is generated irregularly as a result of authentication with the server 8003 or may be a public key.
- the access control information generation unit 8824 corresponds to an access control information generation unit according to the present invention, and generates access control information for accessing the server 8003.
- This access control information is a so-called URI generated by adding the definition of the communication protocol and the server specifying information stored in the server information storage unit 8825 to the transmission information (registration information) generated by the registration information generating unit 8812. (Uniform Resource Identifier).
- the server specifying information stored in the server information storage unit 8825 includes a server name 8826, a server address 8827, a login account 8828 for the server 8003, and a login password 8829.
- access control information which is a so-called URI, is generated as a transmission command format to be transmitted to the server 8003.
- the server communication unit 8830 transmits the access control information generated by the access control information generation unit 8824 in packet units to the server 8003 via the Internet 8834. Also, IP communication is usually required for communication on the Internet. Therefore, the server communication unit 8830 automatically uses the IP (Internet Protocol) address 8832 and the MAC (Media Access Control) address of the communication apparatus 8002 stored in the IP communication information storage unit 8831 as access control information in packet units. Grant and send.
- IP Internet Protocol
- MAC Media Access Control
- the communication device identification information 8814 added to the external device information in the registration information generation unit 8812 is clearly different from the IP address or MAC address stored in the IP communication information storage unit 8831.
- the MAC address is information that uniquely identifies a device in communication control, but is information that can be identified in the Internet communication network.
- the communication device identification information 8814 is information in which the product attribute of the communication device 8002 such as the manufacturer or the type of the communication device 8002 is set to be distinguishable.
- the communication device identification information 8814 is one of registration information registered in the database 8839 by the server 8003. It is.
- the MAC address is replaced with the MAC address of the router when it passes through the router before being connected to the server 8003, the MAC address of the communication device 8002 is deleted when it reaches the server. There is. Further, the IP address can be changed by a PC or the like, and is not information that can be universally determined for the communication device 8802.
- the communication apparatus identification information 8814 is added to the transmission information (registration information) unit generated by the registration information generation unit 8812 to be transmitted to the server 8003, while the IP address and MAC address communicate with the server 8003. It is assigned to each communication packet in the path. Further, while the communication apparatus identification information 8814 is subjected to the second encryption as the transmission information (registration information) generated by the registration information generation unit 8812, the IP address and the MAC address given to each packet unit are There is no encryption. However, when communicating with the server 8003 using Ipsec (Security Architecture for Internet Protocol), the IP address may be encrypted. However, this is different from the second encryption in which the transmission information (registration information) generated by the registration information generation unit 8812 is encrypted. The encryption of Ipsec is performed in units of IP packets.
- the server 8003 includes a communication unit 8835, a second decoding unit 8836, a first decoding unit 8837, a database registration unit 8838, a database 8839, a display content selection unit 8840, and a WEB server 8841.
- a communication unit 8835 is communicably connected to the communication apparatus 8002 via the Internet 8834 and performs IP communication.
- the second decryption unit 8836 corresponds to the second encryption unit 8823 of the communication device 8002, and decrypts the transmission data (registration information) encrypted by the second encryption unit 8823 of the communication device 8002. Accordingly, the second decryption unit 8836 extracts the communication device identification information 8814 or the user information 8815 assigned by the communication device 8002 and the external device information encrypted by the external device 8001.
- the first decryption unit 8837 decrypts the encrypted external device information obtained by the second decryption unit 8836, and extracts the external device information.
- the external device information is encrypted in the external device 8001 and transmitted to the communication device 8002, and further encrypted in the communication device 8002 and transmitted to the server 8003. Then, the external device information transmitted to the server 8003 is decrypted by the server 8003. Therefore, the external device information is not browsed by the communication device 8802. Although this effect is particularly effective when, for example, the external device 8001 and the communication device 8002 are manufactured by different manufacturers, the description thereof is omitted because it is described above.
- the database registration unit 8838 registers the decrypted communication device information and external device information in the database 8839.
- the communication device information includes communication device identification information 8814 and user information 8815.
- the external device information includes, for example, external device identification information such as a manufacturer number of the external device and a serial number that can identify the type, usage history information of the external device, failure history information, a failure code, and the like.
- the database registration unit 8838 uses the communication device information as the parent (stem), the external device according to the registration information generated as the parent (main, trunk) information as the communication device information and the child (sub, branch) information as the external device information. Register information as children (branches, leaves). Therefore, the database 8839 can manage communication device information as a parent (stem) and external device information as a child (branch, leaf).
- the communication device information includes user information and the like, the same effect as the user registration of the external device 8001 can be achieved.
- the user himself / herself has been required to register the external device 8001 with complicated processing such as input of user information and input of serial number, but according to the present configuration, the communication device 8002
- the user registration can be carried out simply by holding the external device 8001 up.
- the manufacturer of the external device 8001 can check which product is owned by which user according to the linking information with the communication device, it is possible to improve the traceability of the product. Become.
- the display content selection unit 8840 is a portion for selecting the content to be displayed on the display unit 8842 of the communication device 8002 from the WEB server 8841. Specifically, the display content selection unit 8840 selects the content to be displayed on the communication device 8802 according to the external device information decoded by the first decoding unit 8837. Thus, the communication device 8002 can display a home page different for each external device 8001 according to the external device information.
- a home page of the washing machine including an instruction manual of the washing machine and the like can be displayed, and in the case of the microwave, a home page of the microwave can be displayed.
- the external device information decoded by the first decoding unit 8837 also includes, for example, a failure code for the external device 8001. Therefore, since the display content can be selected by the failure code, it is also possible to display on the communication device 8002 a home page describing a countermeasure method in case of failure of the external device information.
- the display content selection unit 8840 and the database 8839 in combination, it is also possible to transmit an announcement of a product having a possibility of a serious accident to the communication device 8002.
- the microwave oven A as the external device 8001 may cause a serious accident.
- the microwave oven A has been touched by the communication device 8802 (referred to as communication device A) and the user registration has been made before.
- the microwave oven A is already registered in the database 8839 in association with the communication device A.
- the user of the communication device A newly purchases the washing machine B as the external device 8001, and touches the washing machine B with the communication device A for the patron user registration.
- the display content selection unit 8840 can send a notification indicating that the use of the microwave oven A should be stopped together with the registration screen of the washing machine B. This makes it possible to greatly reduce the possibility of a serious accident.
- FIG. 89 is a conceptual diagram showing a method of managing communication device information and external device information transmitted from the communication device 8002 by the database 8839 of the server 8003 in Embodiment 8 of the present invention.
- the external device 1, the external device 2, and the external device 3 are touched by the communication device 1 and registered in the database 8839, and the external device 4, the external device 5, the external device 6, and the external device 7 are touched by the communication device 2.
- the case is registered in the database 8839.
- the communication device 1 and the communication device 2 show an example of the communication device 8002
- the external device 1 to the external device 7 show an example of the external device 8001.
- the holder of the communication device 1 holds the external device 1, the external device 2 and the external device 3, and the holder of the communication device 2 holds the external device 4, the external device 5, It can be confirmed that the external device 6 and the external device 7 are owned.
- the feature of the present embodiment is that, even without registration of personal information, it is possible to manage at least the external device linked to the communication device. Further, for example, when a telephone number, an e-mail address, and the like are registered in advance in a communication device 8002 such as a mobile phone, it is possible to manage the external device 8001 by linking to personal information set in the communication device 8002. It will be. In any case, a simple operation of touching the external device 8001 with the communication device 8002 can provide a system capable of performing user registration and the like.
- FIG. 90 is a conceptual diagram showing an image of URI which is access control information to the server 8003 in the access control information generating unit 8824 of the communication apparatus 8002 of the eighth embodiment of the present invention.
- communication device information and external device information are added to the URI, which is access control information, following the protocol name http and the server address (server name).
- the communication apparatus information is subjected to the second encryption, and the external device information is subjected to the first encryption and the second encryption.
- the user of the external device 8001 can perform patrone registration of the external device 8001 with a simple operation of one-touch using the communication device 8002. That is, even if the external device 8001 which can not have the Internet communication function by using the system disclosed in the present embodiment, by relaying the communication device 8802 connectable to the Internet, for example, the user registration etc. It is possible to register external device information including the ID of the In the prior art, it was realized by the user manually inputting to a PC or a mobile phone connected to the Internet, but complicated processing was necessary, but the complicated processing can be simplified. At that time, the external device 8001 can be realized by mounting an overwhelming low cost proximity wireless communication module such as an RFID, without mounting an expensive Internet connection device.
- an overwhelming low cost proximity wireless communication module such as an RFID
- the configurations of the external device 8001, the communication device 8002, and the server 8003 are also characterized.
- FIG. 91 shows a home network environment according to the ninth embodiment.
- FIG. 91 shows a home network environment assumed in the present embodiment.
- Each of the plurality of home networks is configured as a home M1001, M1002, and M1003, and each home network is connected to the registration server M1005 via the Internet M1004.
- the registration server M 1005 may exist in the home.
- the present invention is also effective when the home network is divided into a plurality of places such as villas and offices, or when there are a plurality of home networks in one house, such as a dormitory and a room share.
- a home appliance In the house, as needed, a home appliance is always connected with home appliances such as a TV (M1008, M1009) or a DVD recorder M1010 connected to the Internet M 1004 via a router M1006 or a wireless access point (hereinafter referred to as a wireless AP) M1007. It is assumed that there are digital camera M1011 connected to the Internet M1004, emergency connection home appliances such as a microwave oven M1012, and a refrigerator M1013. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone M1014 is also a terminal that constitutes a home network.
- home appliances such as a TV (M1008, M1009) or a DVD recorder M1010 connected to the Internet M 1004 via a router M1006 or a wireless access point (hereinafter referred to as a wireless AP) M1007. It is assumed that there are digital camera M1011 connected to the Internet M1004, emergency connection home appliances such as a microwave oven M1012, and a refrigerator M1013.
- the respective devices in the ninth embodiment are capable of simple data communication with each other through the close proximity wireless communication device, the information of each device is acquired by the close proximity wireless communication device, and the acquired information is transmitted through the home network device.
- the registration server M 1005 is assumed to be registered.
- FIG. 92 shows a hardware configuration diagram of a communication apparatus M1101 according to the ninth embodiment.
- the communication device M1101 is assumed to have two devices mounted as communication devices.
- NFC Near Field Communicatio
- RF tag RF tag
- the other is a home network communication device M1103, which is a wireless Local Area Network (hereinafter referred to as a wireless LAN) and wireless communication devices such as ZigBee used for in-home device cooperation, Ethernet (registered trademark) and Power Line Communication (hereinafter referred to as PLC) Etc. and communication devices used for mobile devices such as WiMax and 3GPP.
- a wireless LAN wireless Local Area Network
- wireless communication devices such as ZigBee used for in-home device cooperation, Ethernet (registered trademark) and Power Line Communication (hereinafter referred to as PLC) Etc.
- communication devices used for mobile devices such as WiMax and 3GPP.
- the communication device M1101 is provided with a user interface (IF) device M1104.
- the user interface device indicates an input device such as a button and a display, and an output device such as an LED.
- input and output are generally performed using a remote control, and they are physically separated.
- they are treated as the user IF device M1104 for simplification of the description. It shall be.
- FIG. 93 is a functional block diagram for explaining functions operating on the CPU (M1105) of the communication device M1101.
- the device unique ID acquisition unit M1202 in the communication device M1101 obtains information including the device unique ID of the registered device M1201 through the proximity wireless communication device M1102.
- the registered device M1201 transmits registration information including a registration command and a device unique ID by the proximity wireless communication device M1102.
- the registration information including the device unique ID is acquired from the device unique ID acquisition unit M1202, and the registration information creation unit M1204 acquires the home ID from the home ID management unit M1205, and the device unique ID acquisition unit M1202 from the registered device M1201.
- the acquired home ID is added to the registration information acquired through the above to create the added registration information.
- the registration information creation unit M1204 acquires position information from the position information acquisition unit M1206.
- the position information refers to address information based on the zip code input to the TV, geographical position information that can be acquired by the GPS of the mobile phone, etc., and registers the installation position information of the registered device M1201 etc. This makes it possible to facilitate the provision of services such as home appliance traceability.
- the registration information creation unit M1204 transmits the registration information to which the home ID is added to the registration information transmission / reception unit M1207.
- the home ID management unit M1205 manages a home ID different from the communication device ID used by the communication device that configures the home network described above.
- the master device of each communication device manages in units of communication devices, and the management method differs depending on the type of communication devices, so management in units of home is Not done. Also, in some cases, the user may be asked to input an ID for each service, but this is extremely inconvenient for the user.
- the home ID management unit M1205 creates a home ID when performing device registration for the first time.
- the home ID may be created based on the position information or may be created based on the unique ID of the communication device.
- the registration server may create a random number based on the random number and confirm that the registration server does not overlap, or the user may set it.
- the registration information transmission / reception unit M1207 that has received the registration information from the registration information creation unit M1204 transmits the received registration information to the registration server M1005 using the home network communication device M1103.
- the registration server M 1005 collates the transmitted registration information with the registration database M 1208 to determine whether or not registration is possible, and returns a registration response.
- the registration information transmission / reception unit M1207 that has received the returned registration response notifies the user of the result of the above determination using the user IF device M1104. If the registration information can not be registered, the registration information generation unit M 1204 may be notified of the change to request registration information change. As a result, unified management of home network devices including white goods and the like having no user interface device for communication can be performed.
- FIG. 94 is a flowchart for explaining the registration processing of the communication device.
- the communication device M1101 receives the registration command and the device unique ID from the registered device M1201 by the device unique ID acquisition unit M1202 (M1301).
- M1302 it is determined whether the own terminal holds the home ID (M1302). If the home ID is not held (M1302: NO), the process proceeds to home ID acquisition processing (M1303). If the home ID is held (M1302: YES), registration data creation processing (M1304) is performed.
- registration data is transmitted to the registration server M1005 by the registration information transmission / reception unit M1207 (M1305).
- the registration failure notification (M1307) is displayed to the user, and the process ends. If the registration response has been received, it is displayed to the user whether or not the registration may be made using the created information, and if it is OK (M1308), the processing ends. If not, the process returns to the home ID acquisition process. If it is difficult to obtain another home ID, the process ends as a registration failure.
- FIG. 95 is a flowchart for explaining the home ID acquisition process.
- the communication apparatus has an automatic creation function of home ID (M1401), it is automatically created, and if it is not, the user is requested to manually input. If there is no method for manual input, or if the user is denied manual input, the user is notified of registration failure (M1403), and the user is prompted to acquire the home ID by another method.
- the automatic creation function is selected (M1404) according to the situation. In the case where it is possible to acquire geographical position information by GPS, or in the case of a terminal where it is common to register an address like a TV, a home ID is created from the position information (M1405). In a terminal generally placed on the home, a home ID is created using the unique identifier of the communication device (M1406).
- a home ID is created by random numbers (M1407).
- the created home ID is sent to the server (M1408).
- the process returns to creation of the home ID. If it can be used, the user is confirmed (M1410), and if it is OK, the home terminal is registered as a home ID (M1411). If not, return to creation of home ID.
- FIG. 96 is a flowchart of device registration.
- the registration device M 1201 transfers information including the device unique ID to the communication device M 1101 together with the registration command through the proximity wireless communication device.
- the communication apparatus M1101 does not hold the home ID
- the communication apparatus M1101 creates a temporary home ID, and transmits the created temporary home ID to the registration server M1005 through the home network communication device.
- the registration server M1005 adds information on the temporary home ID and sends it back to the communication device M1101.
- registration information including the home ID and the device unique ID is transmitted to the registration server M1005. I see. The registration process of the registered device M 1201 is completed.
- FIG. 97 is a functional block diagram showing a function in the case of sharing a home ID between communication devices.
- Communication devices configuring a home network share home IDs through home network M1601 and home network communication device M1103. Alternatively, they may be shared through the close proximity wireless communication device M1102.
- the communication device (transmission side communication device M1101S) in the present invention sends the sharing command and the home ID to another communication device (reception side communication device (reception side communication device) M1101R) through the close proximity wireless communication device M1102. It is possible to share a home ID between communication devices in the home.
- the home ID sharing unit M1602S in the home ID management unit M1205S stores the sharing command and the home ID stored in the home ID storage unit M1209S of the own terminal in the proximity wireless communication device M1102S.
- the home ID of the transmitting communication device M1101S is stored in the close proximity wireless transfer device M1102R of the receiving communication device M1101R.
- the home ID sharing unit M1602R in the reception side communication device M1101R stores the received home ID as the home ID of the own terminal. This makes it possible to share the home ID between the communication devices extremely easily.
- both home IDs are transmitted to the registration server M1005.
- the registration server M 1005 receiving both home IDs virtually manages both home IDs as one home ID.
- either home ID may be notified to all communication devices.
- the home ID in the registration server virtually manages both as one ID.
- the ID of the emergency connection device may be updated each time it is connected, and virtual management may be ended when updating of all registered devices is completed. This makes it possible to originally integrate multiple home networks into one network.
- sharing may be performed using a home network.
- the home network connection detection unit M1603S detects that the communication device not holding the home ID is connected to the home network M1601
- the home ID sharing request is broadcast to the terminal connected to the home network.
- the terminal holding the home ID returns the home ID to the terminal that has transmitted the sharing request. This makes it possible to complete the home ID at the stage of prior communication.
- the master terminal responding to the sharing request is set in advance among the terminals holding the home ID, a large number of sharing responses are sent back from a plurality of terminals to avoid applying an excessive load to the home network. Is possible.
- the home ID acquisition process may be performed by the own terminal.
- FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an operation of the receiving communication device M1101R in the case of sharing the home ID using the close proximity wireless communication device M1102.
- the communication apparatus determines whether the home terminal holds the home ID (M1702). If not held in the own terminal, the received home ID is registered as the home ID of the own terminal (M1703). When held in the own terminal, the held home ID is compared with the received ID. If they are equal, exit without doing anything. If not equal, the home ID is selected (M1705). The home ID may be selected by the own terminal or by the registration server. When the selection is requested to the registration server, the home ID of the own terminal and the received ID are transmitted to the registration server as shared information (M1706).
- the sharing response including the home ID selected by the registration server is received (M1707), the user is confirmed (M1708), and the process is ended if it is OK. If not OK, the process returns to the selection of the home ID. If the communication apparatus selects the home ID of its own terminal, it transmits the ID obtained by using the ID of its own terminal as the home ID as the shared ID to the registration server (M1709). The registration server notifies the communication device having the shared ID that the home ID has been updated. If the received home ID is selected, the home ID of the own terminal is updated (M1710). Furthermore, the registration server receives, as a home ID, the ID received with the old ID of the own terminal as the shared ID (M1711). The registration server similarly notifies the communication device having the shared ID that the home ID has been updated.
- FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an operation of the transmission-side communication device M1101S in the case of sharing the home ID by using the close proximity wireless transfer device M1102.
- the terminal that has transmitted the sharing command and the home ID determines whether a sharing response is sent from the registration server (M1752). If the sharing response has not been received, the process ends. When the sharing response including the home ID update notification is received, the home ID is updated (M1753) and the process ends.
- FIG. 100 is a sequence diagram of the case where the registration server selects.
- the transmitter communication device M1101S transmits the home ID_A to the receiver communication device M1101R using the proximity wireless communication device.
- the reception-side communication device M1101R combines the home ID_B held by the own terminal with the received home ID_A in the registration server M1005, and transmits the received data.
- the registration server selects the home ID_B from the received IDs, and sends a notification to store the home ID_B in the communication terminal having the home ID_A and the receiving communication device M1101R.
- FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an operation of the transmission-side communication device M1101S in the case of sharing the home ID using the home network communication device M1103.
- the communication terminal which has detected connection to the home network broadcasts a home ID sharing request into the home network (M1802). If a share response is returned, the received home ID is registered in the own terminal (M1804). If not returned, home ID acquisition processing (M1303) is performed.
- FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an operation of the receiving communication device M1101R in the case of sharing the home ID using the home network communication device M1103.
- the communication terminal having received the home ID sharing request determines whether or not the own terminal is the master terminal of the home network (M1852), and if it is the master terminal, the home ID of the own terminal is used as the sharing response Send (M1853). If it is not a master terminal, nothing is done. In addition, when setting as a master is not performed in a terminal having a home ID, it is assumed that all terminals send back without determining whether it is a master or not.
- FIG. 103 is a sequence diagram in the case of sharing the home ID using the home network communication device M1103.
- the communication device When the communication device detects that it is connected to the home network, it broadcasts a home ID request to the home network. Of the communication devices that have received the home ID sharing request, only the communication terminal M 1854 that has been subjected to master setting sends back a home ID sharing response. The communication apparatus having received the sharing response stores the received home ID as the home ID of the own terminal.
- FIG. 104 shows a system according to this embodiment, which includes a terminal device Y01, a communication device Y02, and a server Y04.
- the subject matter of the present embodiment is a communication device.
- the terminal device Y01 is a device having an NFC communication function (RFID, IC tag, NFC tag emulation), and is an electronic terminal device such as a refrigerator, a microwave, a washing machine, a television, a recording device, etc.
- the terminal device information holds a serial number indicating the terminal device, usage history information of the terminal device, error information, and the like.
- the communication device Y02 has an NFC communication function of the terminal device and an NFC communication function capable of communicating by proximity wireless communication, and has a reader / writer function of reading out the terminal device information held by the terminal device. Further, the communication device is a portable device and refers to a portable device such as a mobile phone terminal or a remote control terminal of a television.
- the server Y04 is a server communicably connected to the communication device Y02 via a general-purpose network such as the Internet, and internally has a DB (database), and the DB includes a terminal device Y01 to a communication device Y02.
- the read terminal device information is accumulated.
- the terminal device Y01 includes a central processing unit (CPU) Y011, a failure sensing unit Y012, a usage history logging unit Y013, a memory Y014, a modulation unit Y017, and an antenna Y018.
- CPU central processing unit
- Y012 failure sensing unit
- Y013 usage history logging unit
- Y013 memory
- modulation unit Y017 modulation unit
- antenna Y018 an antenna Y018.
- the CPU (Y011) is a part that performs system control of the terminal device Y01.
- the CPU controls the failure sensing unit Y012, the usage history logging unit Y013, the memory Y014, and the modulation unit Y017, which are constituent elements of the terminal device.
- the failure sensing unit Y012 is a portion that senses a failure location and failure content of each component of the terminal device Y01.
- the fault information sensed by the main fault sensing unit Y012 is stored in a RAM (Random Access Memory) of the memory Y014.
- the fault information to be sensed is an error code, and is a code uniquely determined by the location and symptom of the fault.
- the use history logging portion Y013 is a portion for logging use history information each time the user operates the terminal device Y01, and the logged use history information is accumulated in the RAM (Y016) of the memory Y014.
- the use history logging unit Y013 it is desirable that the use history logging unit Y013 according to the present embodiment accumulates use history information that is new in time series in the RAM by using the RAM (Y016) as a FIFO (First In, Fist Out).
- the usage history information several steps before is preferentially stored in the RAM based on the timing at which the failure sensing unit Y012 detects the failure. desirable. Therefore, when five minor failures are detected during use, the operation history information of several steps which led to the five failures is preferentially held.
- the memory Y014 includes a read only memory (ROM) Y015 and a random access memory (RAM) Y016.
- ROM read only memory
- RAM random access memory
- the serial number indicating the position (unique) of this terminal Y01 is recorded in advance in ROM (Y015), and the user of this terminal can not update the contents recorded in this ROM. ing.
- the serial number is information by which the manufacturer, the manufactured lot number, and the manufacturing date can be determined.
- this ROM be configured inside the semiconductor chip of the CPU (Y011). In this case, the memory access information can not be easily viewed.
- the secret key information for authentication and encrypted communication during close proximity wireless communication with the communication apparatus may be recorded at the time of shipment. It becomes possible.
- the RAM (Y016) is a rewritable memory, and stores fault information sensed by the fault sensing unit Y012 and usage history information logged by the usage history logging unit Y013.
- the modulation unit Y017 is a unit that modulates communication data during close proximity wireless communication with the communication device Y02.
- the modulation method differs depending on the NFC standard to be used, and amplitude modulation (ASK), frequency modulation (FSK), phase modulation (PSK) or the like is used.
- the antenna Y018 uses a loop antenna, generates electromagnetic induction from radio waves transmitted from the antenna of the communication device Y02, generates power for driving at least the modulation unit and the memory, and generates radio waves transmitted from the communication device Y02
- the signal modulated by the modulation unit Y017 is superimposed on the reflected wave, and the terminal device information recorded in the memory Y014 is transmitted to the communication device Y02.
- the terminal device detects a failure of each internal component, logs usage history and stores it in the memory, and can perform proximity wireless communication in proximity to the communication device Y02. Then, it becomes possible to transmit the terminal device information stored in the memory to the communication device Y02.
- the subject of the invention disclosed in the present embodiment is the present communication device Y02.
- the communication apparatus Y02 includes an antenna Y021, a CPU (Y022), a demodulator Y023, a memory Y024, a position information positioning unit Y027, a GPS antenna Y031, a communication memory Y032, an information provider Y035, and a communication unit Y036.
- the antenna Y 021 performs polling for calling to an unspecified terminal device in order to search for a terminal device capable of proximity wireless communication with the communication device Y 02. Also, when there is a response to polling, close proximity wireless communication with the terminal device is established, and the modulated terminal device information transmitted from the terminal device Y01 is received and output to the demodulator Y023. .
- the polling operation needs to be always performed even when there is no terminal device capable of close proximity wireless communication, but this involves power consumption. Therefore, by providing a switch (not shown) for controlling the timing of starting polling and performing the polling operation when the switch is turned ON, it becomes possible to significantly reduce the polling time. It is possible to significantly reduce the power consumption of the communication device Y02. In particular, it is effective when the communication device operates with limited power, such as a battery or a battery.
- the CPU (Y 022) is a part that performs system control of the present communication device, and controls the operation of each component of the communication device.
- the demodulation unit Y023 is a unit that demodulates the modulation corresponding to the modulation unit Y017 of the terminal device Y01.
- the terminal device information that has been demodulated is temporarily output to the memory Y024.
- the memory Y 024 internally includes a ROM (Y 025) and a RAM (Y 026).
- the ROM (Y025) is a memory configured to be non-rewritable from the outside, and at the time of shipment of the communication device, a serial number capable of uniquely identifying the communication device Y02 is recorded. It is desirable that the serial number is information by which the maker of the communication device Y02, the manufactured lot number, and the manufacturing date can be determined. In addition, it is desirable that this ROM be configured inside the semiconductor chip of the CPU (Y022). In this case, memory access information can not easily be viewed, and in this case, secret key information for authentication and encrypted communication during close proximity wireless communication with terminal device Y01 is recorded at the time of shipment. Is possible.
- the RAM (Y026) is received by the antenna Y021, and the terminal device information of the terminal device Y01 demodulated by the demodulation unit Y023 is accumulated.
- the terminal device information includes the serial number of the terminal device capable of uniquely identifying the terminal device Y01, the usage history information of the terminal device Y01, and the failure code.
- the position information positioning unit Y027 is configured of a sensor group for specifying the location of the communication device Y02, and is configured of a latitude positioning unit (GPS) Y028, an altitude positioning unit Y029, and a position correction unit Y030. Further, when the position information positioning unit Y027 is configured to obtain position information when communication between the communication device Y02 and the terminal device Y01 becomes possible from the antenna Y021, there is no need to constantly obtain position information. The power consumption of the communication device Y02 can be reduced.
- GPS latitude positioning unit
- the history positioning unit Y 028 is a general GPS (Global Positioning System), and is a portion capable of performing three-dimensional positioning on the earth by receiving radio waves from artificial satellites.
- GPS Global Positioning System
- the altitude positioning unit Y 029 is a general altimeter, and there are many such ones that receive radio waves to extract altitude, and those that measure air pressure to measure altitude.
- the present altitude positioning unit Y 029 is provided to enable sensing of the altitude even in the room where the GPS radio wave can not be received.
- the position correction unit Y 030 is a unit that corrects the GPS positioning value in order to further refine the position information that has been called by the GPS. Normally, in a situation where GPS can not receive radio waves from satellites, such as indoors, it becomes impossible to obtain correct position information. Therefore, this position correction unit Y 030 has an electronic compass and a 6-axis acceleration sensor inside, extracts the moving direction of the communication device from the electronic compass, and the moving speed from the acceleration sensor in places where GPS positioning is difficult. It is possible to correct the position information determined by the GPS.
- the information adding unit Y035 transmits the terminal device information received from the terminal device Y01 and stored in the memory Y024 to the server Y04, the serial number of the communication device Y02 recorded in the ROM (Y025) of the memory Y024. And the position information measured by the position information positioning unit Y 027 to the terminal device information.
- the server Y 04 it is possible to distinguishably manage from which communication device the terminal device information was transmitted, at which position, etc.
- the possibility of a serious accident of the terminal device at the manufacturer side In this case, knowing the DB of server Y04 makes it possible to understand where the terminal device is located, shorten the product collection time, and reduce the possibility of serious accidents, and it is safe to use the product, It is possible to connect safely.
- the communication device Y02 has a display function such as a mobile phone terminal, it can be known to which communication device a terminal device having a possibility of an accident is capable of proximity wireless communication, and the accident information of the terminal device If it is configured to display on the corresponding communication device, the user who uses the terminal device is transmitted to the communication device by transmitting accident information of the terminal device that is not generally connected to the general-purpose network without a display function. Enlightenment can be performed, and this also enables provision of equipment that leads to the safety and security of the user using the terminal device.
- the communication unit Y036 is a portion that communicates with the server Y04 via the Internet via a general LAN, wireless LAN, or mobile telephone communication network, and is a terminal device to which the serial number and position information of the communication device are given as communication device information. It is a part that sends information to the server Y04.
- a MAC (Media Access Control) address and an IP (Internet protocol) address are further assigned, and transmitted to the server Y 04.
- the server Y04 is a server connected to the communication device Y02 via a general-purpose network such as the Internet.
- the server Y04 internally includes a device management DB (Data Base) that manages terminal devices.
- the device management DB receives the terminal device information linked to the communication device information.
- the communication device is managed as a parent device, and the terminal device is managed as a child device in association with the parent device.
- the position information acquired by the communication device is attached to the child device, and it becomes possible to simultaneously manage information on where the terminal device is located.
- the terminal device information of the terminal device is read by the communication device through the close proximity wireless communication, and the communication device touches the serial number of the communication device or the communication device to the terminal device. Then, the position information for which the close proximity wireless communication has become possible is associated and transmitted to the server.
- the server can associate and manage the communication device as a parent device and the terminal device as a child device. Therefore, when the manufacturer determines that the terminal device may cause a serious accident, the terminal device can be easily collected or the possibility of the serious accident may be displayed on the display unit of the corresponding communication device. It will be possible to realize product traceability and provide safe and secure equipment.
- FIG. 105 is a sequence diagram showing an operation of each component of the system described in FIG.
- polling for establishing close proximity wireless communication is performed from the communication device Y02 to the terminal device Y01.
- the terminal device Y01 establishes close proximity wireless communication between the terminal device Y01 and the communication device Y02 by responding to the polling of the communication device Y02 (SY02).
- position information is acquired by the position information positioning unit Y027 of the communication device Y02 and extracted as position information of the terminal device.
- the acquisition of the position information is not limited to the completion of the polling. As long as polling response transition and close proximity wireless communication are established, it does not matter at any time. The point is that it is important to extract the location of the terminal device with high accuracy by acquiring location information established by proximity wireless communication, which can communicate only several centimeters.
- the terminal device After the close proximity wireless communication is established in SY 02, the terminal device authenticates the communication device, and the communication device authenticates the terminal device using authentication using a general public key encryption and temporarily An encryption key generated between the terminal device and the communication device is key shared (SY03). Thereafter, while the proximity wireless communication is established, it is possible to prevent wiretapping by communicating by encrypting the communication path using this encryption key.
- the terminal device information stored in the memory Y014 of the terminal device Y01 is transmitted from the terminal device Y01 to the communication device Y02 (SY04).
- the communication device Y02 when terminal device information is received from the terminal device Y01, it is stored in the memory Y024 of the communication device (SY05).
- the communication device Y02 when the reception of the terminal device information from the terminal device Y01 is completed, the communication device Y02 issues a connection request to the server Y04 (SY06).
- the server Y04 returns a response to the connection request of SY06 and establishes communication (SY07).
- the communication device information of the communication device is added to transmit the terminal device information of the terminal device to the server (SY08).
- the communication device information is the serial number of the communication device, the location information of the communication device while proximity wireless communication is established with the terminal device, and the registered user's e-mail address if registered in the communication device. If it is registered in the communication device, it means a connection account to a registered server.
- the terminal device information with the communication device information is transmitted to the server Y04 (SY09).
- the server Y 04 completes the process by registering the terminal device information with the communication device information received from the communication device Y 02 in the device management DB (Y 041).
- the server Y 04 performs device management for every house by associating and managing a terminal device which has been in close proximity wireless communication by touching with the communication device Y 02 with identification information (such as manufacturing number) of the communication device. It becomes possible.
- the positional information registered as an installation place of a terminal device uses the positional information with which the communication apparatus and the terminal device established close proximity wireless communication.
- the close proximity wireless transfer according to this embodiment uses a general HF band (13.56 MHz band), so the communicable distance is several centimeters. Therefore, by setting the position information at which the close proximity wireless communication is established as the position information of the terminal device, the error becomes a maximum of several centimeters, and it is possible to secure sufficient accuracy to realize the traceability of the product.
- FIG. 106 is a conceptual diagram of a terminal device group managed in association with the communication device Y02 in the device management DB (Y041) of the server Y04.
- the communication device Y02 When using the communication device Y02 to register a favorite user when purchasing a terminal device, after installing the terminal device, touch the terminal device with the communication device to bring the terminal device information of the terminal device closer to the communication device It reads out via wireless communication, gives communication device information to the server, and transmits it. Then, in the device management DB on the server side, the communication device is managed in association with the parent device and the terminal device as a child device.
- a terminal device 1 for example, a microwave oven
- a terminal device 2 for example, a washing machine
- Managing location information such as history and altitude
- usage status information usage history, error code, usage time, etc.
- communication devices for example, television
- the communication device reads the position information and detects it as position information of the terminal device, so the position of the terminal device is registered within an error range of several centimeters with which proximity wireless communication can be communicated. It is possible to In order to realize this, it is not necessary to have a GPS for each terminal device by detecting the position information of the terminal device using the GPS mounted on the communication device, and the cost can be reduced.
- FIG. 107 is a conceptual diagram showing a display screen outputted to the display unit of the communication device when the terminal device Y01 is touched by the communication device Y02.
- the terminal apparatus communicating in the close proximity wireless communication is displayed on the screen so as to touch (Y060).
- the close proximity wireless communication between the communication device and the terminal device is established, and the communication device reads the terminal device information from the terminal device, acquires current position information, temporarily stores it in the memory, and the server Y04 And establish communication device information, and transmit communication device information and assigned terminal device information to the server.
- the server determines whether or not the transmitted terminal device information is already registered in the device management DB, and when it is determined that the information is not registered, displays a message prompting registration of the device to the communication device Display on the unit (Y061).
- the server outputs a message prompting registration of the position information of the device from the server to the communication device, and when the user selects to register, the terminal transmitted from the communication device to the server
- the position information associated with the device information is registered in the device management DB of the server as the position information of the terminal device to be registered (Y062).
- the terminal apparatus communicating in the close proximity wireless communication is displayed on the screen so as to touch (Y063).
- the communication device When the communication device is touched by the terminal device, close proximity wireless communication is established, and the communication device reads the terminal device information from the terminal device, acquires position information, and transmits the terminal device to which the communication device information is added to the server Do.
- the server the fact that the touched terminal device is already registered from the device management DB, the serial number of the terminal device included in the terminal device information received by the server, and the serial number registered in the device management DB
- the position information is extracted from the communication device information received by the server, and the position information registered in the device management DB is collated to determine whether they match.
- position information since position information has an error, it is determined whether the same position or a different position by performing threshold determination on the order of several centimeters (a value corresponding to the distance in which proximity wireless communication is possible). If it is determined that the position is a different position, a message notifying that the position information that has already been registered is different is output to the display unit of the communication device (Y064).
- the position information acquired by the communication device due to the touch is registered in the device management DB of the server as new position information of the terminal device.
- FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a system in the present embodiment.
- This system includes a home network N100 provided in the house of FIG. 111, a plurality of network products (FIG. 111) such as the television N10A provided with the RF-IDN 10 (FIG. 108), and a mobile device N20 (FIG. 109) and a registration server N40 (FIG. 110).
- a home network N100 provided in the house of FIG. 111
- a plurality of network products such as the television N10A provided with the RF-IDN 10 (FIG. 108)
- a mobile device N20 FIG. 109
- a registration server N40 FIG. 110
- FIG. 108 is a functional block diagram of RF-ID in the present embodiment.
- the RF-IDN 10 of FIG. 108 is recorded in an antenna N11 for close proximity wireless communication, a power supply unit N12 operating with power from the antenna N11, a memory N13 which is a non-volatile memory for recording individual identification information, and a memory N13. It comprises a reproducing unit N14 for reproducing the content and a data transfer unit N15 for transmitting the data stored in the memory N13 via the antenna N11.
- the memory N13 has a UID part N13A for specifying a product on which the RF-ID N10 is mounted, a part number ID part N13B for specifying a product number of a product on which the RF-ID N10 is mounted, and server specifying information N13C of the registration server N40 (FIG. 110). , And an operation program N13D to be executed by the mobile device N20 (FIG. 109).
- FIG. 109 is a functional block diagram of the mobile device N20 in the present embodiment.
- the mobile device N20 of FIG. 109 includes an RF-ID reader / writer N21 that receives data transmitted from the RF-ID N10 (FIG. 108), and an RF-ID storage unit N22 that stores data transmitted from the RF-ID N21.
- a program execution unit N23 that executes a program included in the data, a data processing unit N24 that performs data processing on image information included in the data, a memory unit N25 to which the image information processed by the data processing unit N24 is output Display N26 for displaying images temporarily stored in N25, communication I / F N27 connected to other devices via a general-purpose network, and transmission for transmitting data via communication I / F N27 Section N28, a receiving section N29 for receiving data via communication I / F section N27, and a communication I / F section N27
- a communication unit N30 that communicates with other devices via a work, a GPS N31 that measures absolute position information of the mobile device N20, a six-axis sensor N32 that measures relative position information of the mobile device N20, and GPSNs 31 and 6
- the position information storage unit N33 stores the measurement result of the axis sensor N32, and the position information stored in the position information storage unit N33 is analyzed.
- FIG. 110 is a functional block diagram of registration server N40 in the present embodiment.
- the registration server N40 in FIG. 110 has a communication I / F unit N41 connected to another device via a general-purpose network, a transmitter N42 transmitting data via the communication I / F unit N41, and a communication I / F unit N41.
- Product information management unit N45 an image data storage unit N46 storing image data to be transmitted to the mobile device N20, a program storage unit N47 storing a program to be transmitted to the mobile device N20, and a product information management unit N45
- Location information creation unit N48 that creates a map indicating the location relationship of the product on which the RF-ID is loaded by A product control unit N49 from the current position information management unit N45 information and the mobile device N20 stored in controlling the products with RF-IDN10, in constructed.
- FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of network products in the present embodiment.
- the living room on the first floor has a television N10A, a BD recorder N10B, an air conditioner N10C, and an FF heater N10K, and a western room on the first floor has an air conditioner N10D and a fire.
- FIG. 112 is a configuration diagram showing an example of a system in the present embodiment.
- the system of FIG. 112 is configured of home appliances installed in the layout of FIG.
- This system includes a television N10A to FF heater N10K equipped with the RF-IDN 10 of FIG. 108 and a communication I / F unit N18 connected to another device via a general-purpose network, and a mobile device N20 of FIG. 112, the registration server N40 of FIG. 110 (the bottom of FIG. 112), the in-home network N100 connecting the television N10A to the FF heater N10K and the mobile device N20, and the in-home network N100 connected and registered It comprises an outside network N101 connected to the server N40.
- FIG. 113 is a sequence diagram of registering the information of the television N10A in the registration server N40.
- the reproduction unit N14 of the RF-IDN 10 creates product data including the UID unit N13A, the product number ID unit N13B, the server identification information N13C, and the information stored in the operation program N13D of the memory N13.
- FIG. 114A and FIG. 114B are diagrams showing an example of the configuration of product data.
- the product data in FIG. 114A is the part number of the television N10A (including color information) as the part number ID, the serial number of the television N10A as the UID, the address information and login ID and password of the registration server N40 as server identification information, and the mobile device N20. It comprises an operation program executed by the program execution unit N23.
- the data transfer unit N15 of the RF-IDN 10 modulates the product data and transmits it to the RF-ID reader / writer N21 of the mobile device N20 through the antenna N11 (FIG. 113 (2)).
- the RF-ID reader / writer N21 of the mobile device N20 receives the product data and stores it in the RF-ID storage unit N22.
- the program execution unit N23 executes the operation program included in the product data stored in the RF-ID storage unit N22.
- the operation "create server registration data to be transmitted to the address of the registration server N40 included in the product data” is executed as the operation program.
- FIG. 114B is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of server registration data.
- the server registration data in FIG. 114B includes the part number (including color information) of the television N10A as part number ID, the serial number as UID, the login ID and password of the registration server N40 as server identification information, and the position information of the mobile device N20. There is.
- the GPS N 31 operates constantly while the mobile device N 20 is activated, and stores the measurement result in the position information storage unit N 33.
- the six-axis sensor N32 operates when the GPS N31 is out of the measurement area, and stores the measurement result in the position information storage unit N33.
- the program execution unit N23 creates position information of server registration data from the measurement results of the GPS N31 and the six-axis sensor N32 stored in the position information storage unit N33.
- the program execution unit N23 creates server registration data shown in FIG. 114B from the created position information and the information stored in the RF-ID storage unit N22.
- the communication unit N30 sets the destination of the server registration data to the address of the registration server N40 stored in the RF-ID storage unit N22.
- the transmitting unit N28 transmits the created server registration data via the communication I / F unit N27 (FIG. 113 (3)).
- the receiving unit N43 of the registration server N40 receives server registration data via the communication I / F unit N41.
- the communication unit N44 confirms the login ID and password of the server registration data.
- the product information management unit N45 stores the product number ID of the server registration data, the UID, and the position information.
- FIG. 115A shows an example of product information of the television N10A stored in the product information management unit N45.
- Location information is composed of longitude, latitude, and altitude.
- the communication unit N44 of the registration server N40 sends a server registration completion notification including the image information stored in advance in the image data storage unit N46 and the operation program stored in the program storage unit N47. Create and set the destination to the address of the mobile device N20.
- the transmitting unit N42 transmits the created server registration completion notification via the communication I / F unit N41 (FIG. 113 (4)).
- the receiving unit N29 of the mobile device N20 receives the server registration completion notification via the communication I / F unit N27.
- the communication unit N30 confirms the destination address of the server registration completion notification, and transfers it to the program execution unit N23.
- the program execution unit N23 executes an operation program included in the server registration completion notification.
- an operation "display image data on the display unit N26" is executed as an operation program.
- Program execution unit N23 instructs data processing unit N24 to process image data.
- the data processing unit N24 performs data processing of image data. For example, decompression is performed when the image to be downloaded is compressed, and decryption is performed when the image is encrypted, and the downloaded image information is arranged in an image display style based on the image display style sheet. Do.
- the data processing unit N24 temporarily stores the image data in the memory unit N25.
- the display unit N26 displays the image data accumulated in the memory unit N25.
- the image data stored in the memory unit N25 is an image indicating that the registration of the product has been normally completed.
- FIG. 115B is a diagram showing an example of product information managed by the product information management unit N45 of the registration server N40 after registration of the BD recorders N10B to FF heater N10K in the registration server N40 in the same procedure as the television N10A. .
- the product information registered from within the home of FIG. 111 is managed in the same table. Here, it is determined that a product registered by the same mobile device N20 is a product registered from the same home.
- FIG. 116 shows an example of a processing flow at the time of product registration of the RF-IDN 10.
- the RF-IDN 10 is in a state of waiting for power supply from the mobile device N 20 (N 001).
- the RF-IDN 10 moves to N002, and if not received, it returns to N001.
- product data including information of the memory N13 is obtained. Thereafter, at N003, the product data is transmitted from the antenna N11 to the mobile device N20, and the process ends.
- FIG. 117 illustrates an example of a process flow at the time of product registration of the mobile device N20.
- power is supplied from the RF-ID reader / writer N21 to the RF-IDN 10 at N001.
- the mobile device N20 is in a standby state for product data from the RF-ID N10 (N005).
- the mobile device N20 If the mobile device N20 receives product data from the RF-IDN 10, the mobile device N20 moves to N006. If not received, the mobile device N20 returns to N004 to supply power to the RF-IDN 10 again.
- the mobile device N20 measures its own position.
- server registration data including position measurement results is created.
- server registration data is transmitted from the communication I / F unit N 27 to the registration server N 40.
- the mobile device N20 waits for a server registration completion notification from the registration server N40 (N010).
- the mobile device N20 If the mobile device N20 receives the server registration completion notification from the registration server N40, the mobile device N20 proceeds to N011.
- the server registration completion notification is analyzed. Thereafter, the image information included in the server registration completion notification is displayed on the display unit N26 at N012, and the process ends.
- FIG. 118 shows an example of a processing flow at the product registration of the registration server N40.
- the registration server N40 is in a standby state for server registration data from the mobile device N20 (N013).
- the registration server N40 receives server registration data from the mobile device N20, it moves to N014, and if not, it returns to N013.
- the server registration data is analyzed at N014, and it is confirmed whether the login name and password match. Thereafter, if the login name and the password match in N015, the product information is stored in the product information management unit N45.
- a server registration completion notice including the operation program and the image information is created.
- the server I / F unit N41 transmits a server registration completion notification to the mobile device N20, and the process ends.
- FIG. 119 is a sequence diagram showing an example of controlling the power supplies of the air conditioner N10J and the television N10A when moving from the first floor to the second floor of the mobile device N20.
- the CPU N34 of the mobile device N20 monitors the position information stored in the position information storage unit N33, and creates position information data including current position information when the condition set in advance is satisfied.
- FIG. 120A is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of position information data.
- the position information data is obtained from the second server login ID and second server login password of the registration server N 40 and the position information storage unit N 33, which were previously acquired and stored at the time of product registration in a memory (not shown) It comprises the current position information of the device N20.
- the communication unit N30 (FIG. 109) sets the position information data to the address of the registration server N40 that has registered the product.
- the transmitting unit N28 transmits the position information data to the registration server N40 via the communication I / F unit N27 (FIG. 119 (1)).
- the receiving unit N43 of the registration server N40 receives the position information data via the communication I / F unit N41.
- the communication unit N44 confirms the second server login ID and the second server login password of the position information data.
- the communication unit N44 transfers the position information data to the product control unit N49 (FIG. 110).
- the product control unit N49 transfers the second server login ID to the position information creating unit N48 (FIG. 110).
- the position information creation unit N48 acquires the information of FIG. 115B registered in the product information management unit N45 from the second server login ID according to the instruction of the product control unit N49, and the position information of FIG. A product map indicating the position of products in the home is created and passed to the product control unit N49.
- FIG. 121 shows an example of a product map created by the position information creation unit N48.
- the product map is a 3D map, and the product image figure is placed at the location where each product is located from the location information of each product.
- the product control unit N49 controls the products (TVs N10A to FF heater N10K) using the current position of the mobile device N20 included in the position information data and the home appliance map generated by the position information generation unit N48.
- the product control unit N49 turns on the power of the product having the position closest to the position of the position information received from the mobile device N20.
- device control data including an instruction to turn on the power of the air conditioner N10J is created.
- FIG. 120B is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of first device control data.
- the air conditioner N10J includes a product number ID and a UID, and a product control command for turning on the air conditioner N10J.
- the communication unit N44 sets the address of the mobile device N20 as the destination in the first device control data.
- the transmitting unit N42 transmits the first device control data to the mobile device N20 via the communication I / F unit N41 (FIG. 119 (2)).
- the mobile device N20 When the mobile device N20 receives the first device control data, the mobile device N20 transfers the first device control data to the air conditioner N10J from the part number ID and the UID included in the first device control data (FIG. 119 (2) ').
- the air conditioner N10J When the air conditioner N10J receives the first device control data from the communication I / F unit N18, the power of the air conditioner N10J is turned on if the power of the own device is in the OFF state.
- the product control unit N49 turns off the power of the product having the position farthest from the position of the position information received from the mobile device N20.
- device control data including an instruction to turn off the power of the television N10A is created.
- FIG. 120C is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of second device control data.
- the second device control data is composed of a product number ID and a UID of the television N10A, and a product control command for turning off the television N10A.
- the communication unit N44 sets the address of the mobile device N20 as the destination in the second device control data.
- the transmitting unit N42 transmits the second device control data to the mobile device N20 via the communication I / F unit N41 (FIG. 119 (2)).
- the mobile device N20 When the mobile device N20 receives the second device control data, the mobile device N20 transfers the second device control data to the television N10A from the product number ID and the UID included in the second device control data (FIG. 119 (3) ').
- the television N10A When the television N10A receives the second device control data from the communication I / F unit N18, if the power of the own device is in the ON state, the television N10A turns off the power other than the communication function.
- the present embodiment it is possible to manage the position of the product on which the RF-IDN 10 is mounted by the registration server N40 by using the near field wireless communication of the RF-ID and the position information. . This enables automatic control of the product according to the current position of the mobile device N20.
- 6-axis sensor N32 motion sensor
- position information using measurement results of 6-axis sensor N32 outside the measurement area of GPS N31 can be updated, and accurate position information can be obtained even outside the measurement area of the GPSN 31.
- the mobile device N20 holds the GPS N31 and the six-axis sensor N32
- the present invention is not limited to this.
- the mobile device N20 may be configured to hold only the six-axis sensor N32.
- the product information management unit N45 of the registration server N40 stores relative position information with the television N10A with the television N10A registered first as a reference point.
- the axes are configured by x coordinates, y coordinates, and z coordinates.
- the product number ID and the UID of the product mounted on the RF-IDN 10 and the position information of the mobile device N20 are registered in the registration server N40, but the present invention is not limited to this.
- the registration server N40 receives server registration data of a registered product again, it may perform the process shown in the table of FIG.
- FIG. 124 is a diagram of a table of accuracy identifiers, product number IDs, and processes.
- FIG. 124 is a process when the accuracy identifier indicating the accuracy of the position information, the product number ID corresponding to each identifier, the position information of the server registration data received again, and the position information registered in the product information management unit N45 are different. It is done.
- the registration server N40 If it is determined that the registration server N40 has already been registered in the product information management unit N45 from the product number ID and the UID included in the server registration data received again, the registration server N40 confirms the product number ID.
- the product number ID is a television, a BD recorder, or an FF heater, the product information management unit N45 is updated to position information included in the server registration data received again.
- the mobile device N20 When the product number ID is an air conditioner, a solar cell panel, or a fire alarm, the mobile device N20 is notified of the position information stored in the product information management unit N45. The mobile device N20 corrects its current position information based on the position information received from the registration server N40.
- FIG. 124 Although two types of precision identifiers are shown in FIG. 124, the present invention is not limited to this. Two or more types may be prepared and different processing may be provided for each accuracy identifier.
- the product control unit N49 of the present embodiment is installed in the registration server N40, the present invention is not limited to this.
- it may be mounted on the mobile device N20, and may operate by acquiring a product map from the registration server N40.
- it may be mounted on a not-shown home server connected to the home network N100 other than the mobile device N20.
- the mobile device N20 transmits the location information to the home server, and acquires the product map from the home server.
- the mobile device N20 is connected to the registration server N40 via the in-home network N100 and the out-of-home network N101 in the communication I / F unit (general-purpose I / F unit) N27. It is not a thing.
- the mobile device has a mobile phone function and connects to registration server N40 via at least a mobile phone network via an interface connectable to a mobile phone network (eg LTE) instead of communication I / F unit N27. Good (see Figure 125).
- the mobile device N20 may have an interface connectable to a network such as WiMAX, and may connect to the registration server N40 via at least the WiMAX network. Any other network may be used to connect to the registration server N40.
- the product map created by the position information creation unit N48 is used for determination of product control, but the present invention is not limited to this.
- the image data of the product map created by the position information creation unit N48 may be transmitted to the mobile device N20 and displayed on the display unit N26 of the mobile device N20.
- the position information creating unit N48 creates a product map based on the information in FIG. 115B, but the present invention is not limited to this.
- product information installed in a close home may be detected from the product information management unit N45 based on the position information, and a product map of the close home may be created.
- the product control unit N 49 controls the product by combining the product map of FIG. 121 and the product map of the close home.
- the power of the television N10A farthest from the mobile device N20 is turned off, but if there is a solar cell panel in the close home, control such as keeping the power of the television N10A on is performed.
- the product information management unit N45 of the registration server N40 stores the product number ID, UID, and position information of each product, but the present invention is not limited to this.
- the power ON / OFF state may be acquired and managed in real time via the communication I / F unit N18 of each product.
- the product control unit N49 turns off the power of the television N10A farthest from the mobile device N20, but performs control such as keeping the power of the television N10A ON if the number of products set in advance is turned off. .
- the product control unit N49 turns off the power supply of the farthest product and turns on the power supply of the nearest product.
- the present invention is not limited to this.
- Power on / off of a plurality of products may be controlled based on position information of the mobile device N20.
- the product control unit N49 turns off the power supply of the farthest product and turns on the power supply of the nearest product.
- the CPU N 34 of the mobile device N 20 may store the position information as a movement history in a memory (not shown), and periodically notify the registration server N 40 of the movement history.
- the registration server N40 estimates which product is in the same room / floor from the movement history of the mobile device N20, and manages the estimation result.
- the product control unit N49 may control ON / OFF of the power supply of the product in the same room based on the estimation result. For example, assuming that the television N10A and the air conditioner N10C are in the same room from the movement history, the product control unit N49 turns off the power of the air conditioner N10C when the power of the television N10A is turned off.
- time information of ON / OFF switching of each product may be collected to estimate which product is in the same room / floor.
- the product information management unit N45 manages the product information of FIG. 115A, 115B or 122, and the position information generation unit N48 generates the product map of FIG. 121 or 123, but is limited thereto. It is not a thing.
- the mobile device N20 transmits the image data of the home room created by the user to the registration server N40, and manages it by the product information management unit N45.
- the position information creating unit N48 combines the product information of FIG. 115A, 115B or 122 with the image data of the home room layout to create a product map as shown in FIG.
- personal information such as room image data in the home may be subjected to encryption processing different from product information, and may be transmitted from the mobile device N20 to the registration server N40.
- personal information such as home layout image data may be transmitted to a server different from the product information, and the registration server N40 may create a product map in the procedure of referring to a different server when creating a product map.
- the function of the terminal device Y01 of the eleventh embodiment is mounted on the RF-IDN 10
- the function of the communication device Y02 of the eleventh embodiment is mounted on the mobile device N20.
- the processing of mutual authentication and key sharing may be performed from polling shown in 105.
- each of the above-described embodiments may be realized by LSI (Large Scale Integration), which is typically an integrated circuit. These may be individually made into one chip, or may be made into one chip so as to include all configurations or partial configurations.
- the integrated circuit may be called an IC, a system LSI, a super LSI, an ultra LSI, or the like depending on the degree of integration.
- the method of the integrated circuit is not limited to the LSI, and may be realized using a dedicated circuit or a general purpose processor.
- a reconfigurable processor that can reconfigure connection and settings of circuit cells in an LSI (field programmable gate array) or an LSI may be used.
- FIG. 126 is an overall system diagram in the present embodiment.
- FIG. 126 is composed of an RF-ID O 50, a mobile device O 60, a first server O 101, and a second server O 103.
- the RF-IDO 50 is a device having an NFC communication function, is mounted on an electronic product such as a refrigerator, a microwave, a washing machine, a television, a recording device, etc., and indicates the product as product information in the product memory.
- the product serial number, product usage history information, error information, etc. are held.
- the mobile device O60 has an NFC communication function of the RF-ID O 50 and an NFC communication function capable of communicating by proximity wireless communication, and has a reader / writer function of reading out the product information held by the RF-ID O 50.
- the mobile device is a portable device, and refers to a portable device such as a mobile phone terminal or a remote control terminal of a television.
- the first server O101 is a server communicably connected to the mobile device O60 by a general-purpose network such as the Internet, and internally has a DB (database), and the DB contains a mobile device from the RF-ID O 50.
- the RF-ID information read out by O60 is accumulated.
- the second server O103 is a server communicably connected to the first server O101 by a general-purpose network such as the Internet, and internally has a DB (database), and the DB is provided with the RF-IDO 50. Accumulate building information of the coordinates being
- the RF-ID O 50 includes a product ID O 51, a first server URL O 52, a service ID O 53, and an accuracy identifier O 54.
- the product ID O 51 is an ID for identifying a product on which the RF-ID is mounted, such as a product number (including color information) and a serial number.
- the first server URL O52 is address information of the first server O101.
- an ID indicating a product classification such as a television, an air conditioner, and a refrigerator is set.
- the accuracy identifier O54 is information indicating the reliability of the position information provided by the product ID on which the RF-ID 10 is mounted.
- the RF-IDO 50 if proximity wireless communication is possible in proximity to the mobile device O 60, the product number stored in the memory, the serial number, the URL of the first server, the service ID, It is possible to transmit the accuracy identifier to the mobile device O60.
- the mobile device O60 includes an antenna O61, an RF-ID reader / writer O62, coordinate accuracy identification information O63, a CPU O64, a program execution unit O65, a data processing unit O66, a memory unit O67, a display unit O68d, a communication antenna O68, a transmission unit O70, reception.
- the antenna O61 supplies power and provides an operation clock to an unspecified RF-ID in order to search for an RF-ID capable of proximity wireless communication. Also, when there is a response, close proximity wireless communication with the RF-ID is established, and the modulated information transmitted from the RF-ID O 50 is received.
- the RF-ID reader / writer O62 demodulates the received information.
- the coordinate accuracy identification information O63 extracts an accuracy identifier from the received information.
- the CPU O 64 is a part that performs system control of the mobile device, and controls the operation of each component of the mobile device.
- the program execution unit O65 executes a program based on the service ID included in the received information.
- the data processing unit O66 performs data processing transmitted from the first server.
- Memory unit O67 temporarily stores data.
- the display unit O68d displays the information stored in the memory unit O67.
- the communication antenna O68 is connected to a general-purpose network such as the Internet.
- the transmission unit O70 modulates data to be transmitted to a general-purpose network such as the Internet.
- the receiving unit O71 demodulates data received from a general-purpose network such as the Internet.
- the communication unit O72 creates and analyzes data for communicating with other devices via a general-purpose network such as the Internet.
- the position information storage unit O73 stores the position information measured by the mobile device.
- the RF-ID storage unit O74 stores the product ID and the service ID acquired from the RF-ID O50.
- the RF-ID detection unit O75 detects a response from the RF-ID O10.
- the URLO 76 extracts the URL of the first server from the information received from the RF-ID O 50.
- the reproduction unit O77 reproduces the information stored in the position information storage unit O73.
- the relative position calculation unit O78 calculates relative position information from the position information reproduced from the position information storage unit O73 and the current position information of the mobile device O60.
- the coordinate information transmission unit O79 transmits the position information of the mobile device O60 at the time of receiving the trigger from the RF-ID detection unit O75.
- the recording unit O80 writes the position information sent from the coordinate information sending unit O79 to the position information storage unit O73.
- the building coordinate data output unit O81 extracts building coordinate data received by the communication antenna.
- the registered coordinates O 82 extract data of registered coordinates received by the communication antenna.
- the determination unit O83 determines the accuracy of the data of the registered coordinates extracted at the registered coordinates O82.
- the reference coordinates O84 set the data of the registered coordinates as the reference coordinates, and pass the set reference coordinates data to the position information correction unit O93.
- the position information output unit O85 creates and outputs position information from the direction information O87 and the information from the position information O86.
- the position information O86 and the direction information O87 are position information of the mobile device O60 output from the absolute coordinate calculation unit O107 configured by the position information correction unit O93 and the direction information correction unit O94.
- the magnetic compass O 88 indicates the direction.
- the geomagnetic correction unit O89 corrects magnetic data such as geomagnetism from the magnetic sensors O88a, O88b, O88c in the x, y, z directions, and calculates the absolute direction at the current position of the portable device on the earth.
- the orientation information O89 creates orientation information of the magnetic compass O88.
- the satellite antenna O90 communicates with the satellite.
- the position information calculation unit O91 calculates position information of the mobile device O50 from the communication result with the satellite. For example, latitude, longitude, and altitude are obtained.
- the position information O92 creates position information from the calculation result of the position information calculation unit O91.
- the position information correction unit O93 corrects the result of position information from the integrator O105 and the integrator O106 with the position information O92, the reference coordinates O84, and the information from the building coordinate data output unit O81.
- the direction information correction unit O94 corrects the result of the direction information from the integrator O105 and the integrator O106 with the information from the direction information O89.
- the angular velocity sensor O95 measures the angular velocity in the x-axis direction of the mobile device O60.
- the angular velocity sensor O96 measures the angular velocity in the y-axis direction of the mobile device O60.
- the angular velocity sensor O97 measures the angular velocity in the z-axis direction of the mobile device O60.
- the angular velocity sensor may be replaced by a magnetic sensor because the magnetic sensor detects the direction even without the angular velocity sensor.
- the acceleration sensor O98 measures the acceleration in the x-axis direction of the mobile device O60.
- the acceleration sensor O99 measures the acceleration in the y-axis direction of the mobile device O60.
- the acceleration sensor O100 measures the acceleration in the z-axis direction of the mobile device O60.
- the integrator O105 integrates the measurement results of the angular velocity sensor O95, the angular velocity sensor O96, and the angular velocity sensor O97.
- the integrator O106 integrates the measurement results of the acceleration sensor O98, the acceleration sensor O99, and the acceleration sensor O100.
- the absolute coordinate calculation unit O107 is composed of a position information correction unit O93 and a direction information correction unit O94, and calculates absolute coordinates of the mobile device O60.
- the mobile device O60 can measure the product information of the RF-ID O 50 and the position information of the mobile device O60 when the product information is acquired, and the position information and the RF- The product information of the ID 50 can be associated and transmitted to the first server O10.
- the first server O101 is a server connected to the mobile device O60 via a general-purpose network such as the Internet.
- the first server O101 has registered coordinate data O102 for managing a product having the RF-ID O 50 mounted therein.
- the registered coordinate data O102 receives the information of the RF-ID O10 linked to the mobile device O60.
- the mobile device O60 is managed as a parent device, and the RF-ID O50 is managed as a child device in association with the parent device.
- position information acquired by the mobile device O60 is given to the child device, and it becomes possible to simultaneously manage information on where the terminal device is located.
- by combining the building coordinate data received from the second server O103 and the registered coordinate data O102 it is also possible to create a 3D product map installed in the building, like the mobile device O60.
- the second server O101 is a server connected to the first server O103 via a general-purpose network such as the Internet.
- the second server O103 internally includes a building coordinate database O104 that associates and manages the floor plans of existing buildings and the coordinates (for example, latitude, longitude, altitude) of each building.
- the building coordinate database O104 by combining the registered coordinate data of the first server with the existing building layout and coordinate information, a 3D product map installed in the building is created like the mobile device O60. It is also possible.
- the building coordinate database O104 can also reduce personal information leakage by managing it as personal information on a server with a high security setting separately from the first server O101 (for example, setting incapable of direct communication from the mobile device O60). .
- the product information of the RF-IDO 50 is read by the mobile device O60 through the close proximity wireless communication, and the RF-IDO 50 is touched in the mobile device O60 to enable close proximity wireless communication.
- the position information and the product information of the RF-ID 50 are associated with each other and transmitted to the first server.
- the first server it becomes possible to associate and manage a product in which the mobile device O60 is mounted as a parent device and the RF-ID O 50 as a child device.
- it is possible to create a 3D map of a product by calculating the relative position of each product using the position information of the mounted RF-IDO 50 and the product.
- RF-IDO 50 in each building can be combined with location information of each product managed by the first server. It will be possible to create 3D maps of loaded products.
- the mobile device O60 corrects the current position information of the mobile device O60 according to the reference coordinates set from the received registered coordinates, the building coordinate data, the position information acquired by the position information O92, and the information acquired by the direction information O89. Make it possible to
- the RF-IDO 50 When the RF-IDO 50 is touched by the mobile device O60 to enable close proximity wireless communication, the RF-IDO 50 operates by power supply and clock supply from the mobile device O60.
- the RF-IDO 50 modulates the information of the product ID O 51, the first server URL, the service ID O 53, and the accuracy identifier O 54 indicating the accuracy of the product absolute position stored in the non-volatile memory when power is supplied to the mobile device O60. Send.
- the mobile device O60 When the mobile device O60 receives the product ID O51, the first server URL, the service ID O53, and the accuracy identifier O54 by the antenna O61, the mobile device O60 demodulates it by the RF-IDO 62.
- the URLO 76 extracts the first server URL and passes the information of the first server URL to the communication unit O72.
- the RF-ID storage unit O74 stores information of the product ID O51 and the service ID O53.
- the coordinate accuracy identification information O63 extracts the accuracy identifier and passes it to the determination unit O83.
- the RF-ID detection unit O75 sends a trigger notifying that the information has been received from the RF-ID O50 to the coordinate information transmission unit O79 and the reference coordinate O84.
- the coordinate information transmission unit O79 delivers the position information of the mobile device N60 received from the position information output unit O85 to the communication unit O72.
- the result of integration of the results of measurement by angular velocity sensors O95 to O97 by integrator O105 and the result of integration of results of measurement by acceleration sensors O98 to O100 by integrator O106 are input to absolute coordinate calculation unit O107.
- information on the directions of the magnetic sensors O88a, O88b, and O88c may be input to the absolute coordinate calculation unit O107.
- the cost is reduced because the angular velocity sensor can be omitted.
- the absolute coordinate operation unit O107 information on the position information 92 holding the result calculated by the position information operation unit O91 using the satellite antenna O90 and direction information O89 holding the result of the azimuth indicated by the magnetic compass O88.
- the direction information correction unit O 94 and the position information correction unit O 93 correct the results input from the integrators O 105 and O 106 using the information in the above.
- the angular velocity sensors O88a, O88b, O88c are used to estimate the moved distance. At the time of walking, the walking distance is calculated from the number of steps by the number-of-steps detection calculation unit O100a to obtain the position. When entering the house, it becomes difficult for the GPS satellite's radio waves to reach, and the position accuracy is extremely low or it can not be received.
- the moving direction at the time of walking is estimated by the step number detection calculation unit using the acceleration sensor of three axes and the acceleration sensor by the magnetic sensor of three axes. Furthermore, by adding an angular velocity sensor with three axes and measuring the angular velocity, the absolute coordinate position can be measured. By acquiring accurate absolute coordinates from GPS satellites outside the house, and switching to position detection based on acceleration, geomagnetism, and angular velocity when radio waves of the GPS satellites are reduced, accurate absolute coordinates can be maintained for a certain period of time.
- the portable device has accurate absolute coordinate data
- the absolute coordinate on the earth of each product can be linked by sending the absolute coordinate data and the product name, product number and MAC address of the product to the server when approaching or touching There is a great effect that can be recorded on the server with an accuracy of less than 5 cm.
- the absolute coordinate calculation unit O107 outputs the corrected direction information O87 and position information O86 to the position information output unit O85.
- the position information output unit O85 creates position information using the information from the direction information O87 and the position information O86.
- the mobile device O60 creates position information in the above procedure.
- the program execution unit O65 passes the product ID and the service ID stored in the RF-ID storage unit O74 to the communication unit O72.
- the communication unit O72 creates data including the position information from the coordinate information sending unit O79, the product ID from the program execution unit O65, and the service ID in the information, and the URL of the first server received from the URLO 76 is the address of the data Set to and send to the transmission unit O70.
- the transmission unit O70 modulates data and transmits it to the first server O101 via the communication antenna O68.
- the first server demodulates the data upon receiving the data from the mobile device O60.
- the mobile device O60 is a master unit, and the RF-IDO 50 is a slave unit, the mobile device O60 being a master unit, the product ID O51 of the RF-IDO 50 being a slave unit, the service ID O53 and the mobile device O60 are RF-IDO50s.
- FIG. 127 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of products mounted by the RF-IDO 50 in the present embodiment.
- the RF-IDO 50 is installed in all products. Further, it is assumed that all the products are registered in the registered coordinate data of the first server O101 using the mobile device O60 in the procedure of registering the product information of the RF-ID O50 in the first server O101 described above.
- the communication unit 72 of the mobile device O60 creates product information request data that requests the first server O101 for information on the product registered by the mobile device O60.
- the transmission unit O70 modulates the product information request data, and transmits it to the first server O101 via the communication antenna O68.
- the first server O 101 When receiving the product information request data, the first server O 101 creates product information response data including product information of a slave device managed by associating the mobile device O 60 as a parent device, and transmits the product information response data to the mobile device O 60.
- the product information response data includes the product ID O51 of the television O50A, BD recorder O50B, air conditioner O50C, air conditioner O50D, television O50E, air conditioner O50F, service ID and position information.
- the first server O101 transmits the same information as the product information response data to the second server O103.
- the second server O 103 extracts image data including position (coordinates) information of a building located at the same position in the building coordinate database O 104 from the position information of each product included in the product information response data.
- FIG. 128 shows building coordinate data extracted from the building coordinate database O104. It is included in the floor plan image and location information of the building.
- the second server O103 transmits the extracted building coordinate data to the mobile device O60.
- the receiving unit O71 of the mobile device O60 demodulates and passes it to the communication unit O72.
- the communication unit O72 passes the contents of the data to the program execution unit O65.
- the program execution unit O 65 creates image data of a 3D map of a product as shown in FIG. 129 from the position information of each product which is the contents of the product information response data. It is a 3D map that maps to coordinates based on position information of each product, and allows the user to recognize at a glance with different icons for each product.
- the program execution unit O65 passes the created image data to the data processing unit O66.
- the data processing unit O66 temporarily stores the image data in the memory unit O67.
- the display unit O68 d displays the image data of the 3D map of the product shown in FIG. 128 stored in the memory unit O67.
- the receiving unit O71 of the mobile device O60 demodulates it and passes it to the building coordinate data output unit O81.
- the building coordinate data output unit O81 analyzes the building coordinate data and passes it to the display unit O68d.
- the display unit O 68 d displays image data of a 3D map of a product shown in FIG. 130 obtained by combining the image data of FIG. 128 and the image data of FIG. 129 already displayed.
- the first server O101 Upon acquiring the product information of the air conditioner O50D, the first server O101 transmits the acquired position information of the air conditioner O50D to the second server O103.
- the second server O103 extracts the building coordinate data of FIG. 128 corresponding to the position information of the air conditioner O50D from the building coordinate database O104 and transmits it to the first server.
- the first server compares the building coordinate data with the position information of the air conditioner if the product to be registered is a product fixed to the wall such as air conditioner, and if the position information of the air conditioner is not close to the wall, the building coordinate data is mobile Send to device O60.
- the receiving unit O71 of the mobile device O60 demodulates it and passes it to the building coordinate data output unit O81.
- the building coordinate data output unit O81 determines the position information to be corrected from the building coordinate data and the position information of the air conditioner, and passes it to the position information correcting unit O93.
- the position information correction unit O93 corrects the current position of the mobile device based on the position information received from the building coordinate data output unit O81.
- the mobile device O60 registers the air conditioner O50D in the first server O101 based on the corrected current position information.
- the position information of the building coordinate database is compared with the position information measured by the mobile device O60, and the position information measured by the mobile device O60 determines the deviation and corrects the position information of the mobile device O60. It becomes possible.
- the first server O 101 acquires and determines building coordinate data from the second server O 103, but the present invention is not limited to this.
- the mobile device O60 acquires building coordinate data from the second server O103, compares the air conditioner O50D with the building coordinate data, and performs correction The necessity may be determined.
- the mobile device O60 When the mobile device O60 receives the product ID O51 of the RF-ID O50 of the air conditioner O50C, the first server URL, the service ID O53, and the accuracy identifier O54 by the antenna O61, the mobile device O60 demodulates by the RF-ID O62.
- the mobile device O60 Since it is not known at this time whether the product information of the air conditioner O50C is registered in the first server O101 at this time, the mobile device O60 includes the location information, the product ID and the service ID in the first server O101 in the above-mentioned product registration procedure. Send data
- the first server demodulates the data upon receiving the data from the mobile device O60.
- the receiving unit O71 of the mobile device O60 demodulates and passes it to the registered coordinate O82.
- the registered coordinates O82 are passed to the determination unit O83 when the position information is extracted from the data including the position information of the air conditioner O50C.
Abstract
Description
前記外部機器と近接無線通信を行うためのアンテナ部と、前記アンテナ部を介して前記外部機器と通信し、前記外部機器情報を受信する近接無線通信部と、前記近接無線通信部が受信した前記外部機器情報を記憶する外部機器記憶部と、前記外部機器記憶部に記憶された前記外部機器情報と、前記通信装置を識別可能な通信装置識別情報を含む通信装置情報とに基づいて、前記サーバが有するデータベースに登録するための登録情報を生成する登録情報生成部と、前記ネットワークを介して前記登録情報を前記サーバに送信するサーバ通信部とを備える。
本発明の実施の形態1について述べる。図1は本発明の概念図を示す。ここには、撮影装置(カメラ)1、TV(テレビジョン)45およびサーバ42から構成される通信システムが示されている。本図において、左側は撮影時の状況を示し、右側は撮影した画像を再生する時の状況を示す。
いる。RF-IDは13.5MHzで無線LANは2.5GHzであり、同波数が大きく異なり互いに干渉することがない。このため2つのアンテナ20、21を図2Cに示すように、外部から見て、重なるように構成する。これにより設置面積を小さくできるため、撮影装置を小型化することができるという効果が得られる。また2つのアンテナのアンテナカバー22を、図2Cに示すように一つにまとめることができるため電波非遮蔽材料部を最小にできる。プラスチック等の電波非遮蔽材料は金属に比べると強度が低いため、この材料を最小にすることによりボディの強度の低下を軽減できるという効果がある。レンズ6と電源スイッチ3もある。2~16は後で説明する。
情報やサーバアドレスやログインID、パスワードが瞬時に得られるためのサーバ42の中のこのカメラに対応する画像データをダウンロードしてTV45に高速に表示できるという効果がある。
、152sはサーバ42が保持するデータ50としてサーバ42が備える記憶装置にパスワードを記録しても良い。
7fへ進む。
者に郵送する。
52に記憶されたUID部75および動作プログラム116を、アンテナ21を介してRF-IDリーダライタ46に送信するデータ転送部108とを備え、データ転送部108から送信されたUID部75および動作プログラム116は、データ転送部108から、アンテナ21、RF-IDリーダライタ46および赤外線通信路を介して、TV45に転送される点に特徴を有する。以下、各構成要素を詳細に説明する。
記憶する(S6005)とともに、UID、画像サーバURL、動作プログラムをリモコン信号として赤外線方式で送信できる形式に変換しておく(S6006)。そして、ユーザがリモコン827上で所定の操作入力を行い、リモコン信号を送信する指示を受け付けた場合(S6007)、UID、画像サーバURL、動作プログラムを含むリモコン信号をリモコン信号送信部から送信する(S6008)。つまり、リモコン827は、通常のリモコンとしての機能のほかに、内蔵するRF-IDリーダライタ46によって、撮影装置1からTV45に向けて、UID、画像サーバURLおよび動作プログラムを転送する中継器として機能する。
Identifier)、SSIDに相当する情報であってもよい。さらに、上述の第2メモリ52では、撮影装置1を特定する識別情報(UID75)は、動作プログラム116とは別個に格納されていたが、動作プログラム116の中に格納(記述)されていてもよい。
的に行われるため、ユーザの入力ミスは発生しない。また、TV45に接近するという動作が必要なことから悪意のあるユーザによる介在を回避することが可能となる。そのため、チャレンジなどの前処理動作を省略することが可能となる。さらに、物理的に近接させるという動作はユーザにどの端末とどの端末を認証させたかという事を容易に認識させることが可能となる。なお、認証用暗号鍵を認証プログラムに含まない場合には、一般の公開鍵認証と同様の手法を用いて認証処理を行ってもよい。また、通信デバイスは無線LANではなくPLCやEthernet(登録商標)などのホームネットワークを構成するデバイスであればなんでもよい。また、MACアドレスはホームネットワーク内で用いられる通信端末を識別することができる固有識別情報であればなんでもよい。
007によって構成される。
の接続するためのURLであり、本プログラム生成部7005は、URLを用いてサーバへの接続プログラムを生成または更新する。
次に、本発明に係る通信システムの具体的な動作、つまり、カメラで取得した画像をアップロードしておき、その後に、簡単な操作で、その画像をTVにダウンロードして表示する通信システムについて、実施の形態2として、説明する。通信システムの全体構成は、実施の形態1と同様である。
本発明の第3の実施形態について述べる。
本発明の第4の実施形態について述べる。
本発明の第5の形態では、ハガキ等の郵送物に固定の情報が書き込まれており、撮影装置では書き込まれた固定情報とサーバに保存された画像または画像グループ(画像情報)とを紐付けし、再生側ではハガキ等に付けられたRF-IDから固定情報を読み出すことで、固定情報に関連付けられた画像の閲覧を可能にする構成について説明を行う(図63)。図63では、まず郵送物に記録された固定情報を撮影装置で読み取り、画像と郵送物固有IDとの関連づけを行いサーバに登録する。登録が完了した郵送物を受け取ったユーザは、郵送物をテレビジョンのRF-IDリーダに近づけることで固定情報の読み出しを行い、固有情報を用いてサーバに問い合わせを行うことで郵送物に関連づけられた画像の閲覧を行う。
撮影装置により撮影した画像は、先の実施の形態で説明した方法によりサーバにアップロードされる。この時、アップロードした画像または画像グループ毎に識別子が付与され、この識別子によりサーバ上の画像または画像グループが識別可能となる。
次に、関連付けが完了している郵送物を用いて、テレビジョンでサーバに記録されている画像を閲覧する手順について説明する。
本発明の実施の形態6では、撮影装置にて撮影された画像が、画像サーバにアップロードされた後、画像送信側の利用者(以後、送信者と記載する)が画像サーバの画像から画像グループを選定し、この画像グループにアクセスするための情報が郵送物上のRF-IDに記録され、画像受信側の利用者(以後、受信者と記載する)の下へ郵送され、この郵送物上のRF-IDを用いて受信者による画像サーバの画像グループへのアクセスを実現する構成について説明する。
図71の画像送信側において、撮影装置1で撮影された画像は、撮影装置1に搭載された無線LAN、或いはWiMAXなどの無線通信用の第2アンテナ20を用いて無線アクセスポイントに送られ、インターネット40を介して画像サーバ42の画像データ50として記録される。そして、撮影装置1をTV45のRF-IDリーダライタ46に近づけて、撮影装置1に搭載されたRF-IDのための第1アンテナ21を介した無線通信により、TV45との接続を確立する。TV45は、画像サーバ42の画像データ50へのアクセスのための情報を撮影装置1より取得し、画像データ50の画像をダウンロードして表示部110への表示を行う。以上の動作は、先の実施の形態で述べた動作と同様であり、概要のみ述べたものである。
次に、画像受信側について、画像受信側構成の概略図である図72と画像受信側テレビジョンの動作フロー図である図74を用いて説明する。
図75Aおよび図75Bは、本発明の実施の形態6における別の一形態の画像送信側のTV45の動作を示すフロー図である。なお、図75Aおよび図75Bにおいて、図73と同じ処理となるステップは同じ符号を用い、その説明を略する。
本実施の形態では、本発明のRF-IDカードを用いて機器の設定を変更する方法に関して述べる。
(実施の形態8)
以下、本発明における実施の形態8について図面を用いて詳細に説明する。
図91は、実施の形態9のホームネットワーク環境を示す図である。
実施の形態10として、ホームIDを通信端末間で共有する形態について述べる。
択を登録サーバに依頼した場合には、登録サーバに自端末のホームIDと受信したIDを共有情報として送信する(M1706)。登録サーバにより選択されたホームIDを含んだ共有応答を受信し(M1707)、ユーザに確認して(M1708)、OKであった場合には終了する。OKでなかった場合には、ホームIDの選択に戻る。通信装置で自端末のホームIDを選択した場合には登録サーバに自端末のIDをホームIDとして受信したIDを共有IDとして送信する(M1709)。登録サーバは共有IDをもつ通信装置にホームIDが更新されたことを通知する。受信したホームIDを選択した場合には、自端末のホームIDを更新する(M1710)。さらに、登録サーバに自端末の旧IDを共有IDとして受信したIDをホームIDとして送信する(M1711)。登録サーバは同様に共有IDをもつ通信装置にホームIDが更新されたことを通知する。
本実施の形態は、端末装置からNFC(Nier Field Communication)の通信機能を介して、前記端末装置の端末装置情報を読み出し、汎用のネットワークを介してサーバに転送する通信装置について、図面を用いて詳細に説明する。
的に保持する構成になっている。
ド、使用時間など)を通信機器に紐付けて管理することで、通信装置でのタッチを起因として家丸ごとの機器の管理を行うことが可能となり、端末装置のトレーサビリティを実現することが可能となる。
図112は、本実施の形態におけるシステムを示す図である。
ことが可能になる。これにより、モバイル機器N20の現在位置に応じた製品の自動制御が可能になる。
図126は、本実施の形態における全体システム図である。
3 電源スイッチ
6 レンズ
6a 表示部
20 第1アンテナ
21 第2アンテナ
22 アンテナカバー
30 撮像部
31 映像処理部
32 記録再生部
33 第3メモリ
34 ICカード
35 第1処理部
36 暗号部
37 通信部
38 送信部
40 インターネット
42 サーバ
45 TV
46 RF-IDリーダライタ
47 RF-ID部
51 記録再生部
52 第2メモリ
90 URL生成部
91 第2電源部
95 第2処理部
100 電池
101 第1電源部
102 第3電源部
105 データ受信部
106 記録部
107 再生部
108 データ転送部
110 表示部(TV)
111 メディア識別情報
115 サービス内容識別情報
116 動作プログラム
117 動作プログラムが記録されているサーバ上のディレクトリ情報
118 動作プログラム選択情報
119 動作プログラム存在識別子
120 画像表示方法指示情報が記録されているサーバ上のディレクトリ情報
121 画像表示方法指示情報がサーバ上に存在するかの識別子
122 表示順序識別子
123 全画像表示識別子
124 特定ディレクトリの一部の画像情報
125 一覧表示識別子
126 スライドショー識別子
127 画質優先
128 速度優先
129 表示音声のディレクトリ
130 表示音声のディレクトリ
131 一部画像
132 特定使用者の画像
133 特定使用者のパスワード
134 画像の入ったディレクトリ
135 カメラの機種情報
136 強制印刷命令
137 印刷対象の画像データのディレクトリ
138 TVのRF-IDリーダライタのアンテナ
139 ハガキ
140 カメラのアイコン
141 ハガキのアイコン
142 空白画像
143 実画像
170 起動部
171 通信部
172 電源検知部
173 変調部
174 第1メモリ
175 変調切り替え部
500 電子カタログサーバ情報入力機
502 電子カタログ通知カード
504 RF-IDリーダ部
506 電子カタログサーバ
507 電子カタログデータベース
508 顧客属性データベース
520 キー入力受付部
521 RF-ID送信入力受付部
573 URL生成部
584 画像選択部
588 ユーザ情報入力部
589 操作モード判定部
601 顧客属性データ取得部
602 電子カタログデータ取得部
650 電子カタログ表示画面
651 商品データ
652 フォーカス表示された電子カタログ操作選択肢
800 プリンタ
801 RF-ID付葉書
810 葉書送付先情報入力部
820 葉書登録画像を選択する表示画面
821 葉書印刷画像を選択する表示画面
822 葉書挿入メッセージを入力する表示画面
823 葉書送付先情報を入力する表示画面
824 葉書送付確定を確認する表示画面
825 サムネイル画像
826 選択中のサムネイル画像
827 リモコン
2000 レコーダ
2001 チューナ
2002 入力信号処理部
2003 出力信号処理部
2004 システム制御部
2005 メモリ
2006 操作入力部
2007 通信部
2008 HDD
2009 光ディスクドライブ
2010 バス
2011 設定情報処理部
2012 レコーダID
2013 設定情報
2100 RF-IDカード
2101 メモリ
2102 処理部
2103 機器操作情報
2104 操作機器識別情報
2105 対象機器情報
2106 操作指示情報
2107 通信情報
2109、2110、2111 操作指示情報データ
2112 URL
2113 ログインID
2114 パスワード
2250 設定情報
2260 指示内容情報
2261 指示対象情報
2262 通信実施情報
2560 画像サーバ
2561 インターネット
2562 撮影装置
2563 テレビジョン装置
2564 郵送物
2565 RF-ID
3001 郵送物
3002 RF-ID部
3003 メモリ部
3045 テレビジョン
3046 RF-IDリーダライタ
3047 表示部
5501 無線アンテナ
5502 通信可能装置検索部
5503 受信部
5504 復号部
5505 URL生成部
5506 通信部
5507 送信部
5508 通信インタフェース
5509 受信部
5510 データ処理部
5511 メモリ部
5512 表示部
5513 CPU
5940 撮影装置1からサーバ42に撮影画像をアップロードする場合のデータフォーマット
5950 撮影装置1とTV45のRF-ID通信のデータフォーマット
6005 テレビのプログラム実行環境
6006 サーバ接続命令
6007 ダウンロード完了時の処理設定命令
6008 ダウンロード命令
6009 ダウンロード完了時命令
6010 スライドショー表示命令
6512 無線通信装置
6520 表示機能付きリモコン
6521 無線通信送信部
6522 RF-IDリーダ
6523 表示装置
6524 入力装置
6525 プログラム実行バーチャルマシン
6530 表示機能無しリモコン
6531 無線通信送信部
6532 RF-IDリーダ
6533 入力装置
6534 LED
6535 メモリ
7000 強制表示命令格納部
7001 フォーマット識別情報格納部
7002 プログラム記憶部
7003 第2メモリ読み出し部
7004 URL生成部
7005 プログラム生成部
7006 プログラム部品記憶部
7007 プログラム書き込み部
7008 製造番号格納部
7009 言語コード格納部
7010 プログラム実行バーチャルマシン
7020 使用状況検出部
7021 不具合検出部
7022 使用電力検出部
8001 外部機器
8002 通信装置
8003 サーバ
8803 第1暗号部
8804 変復調部
8805 電力誘起部
8806、8808 アンテナ
8807 CPU
8809 変復調部
8810 出力切り替え部
8811 変復調切り替え部
8812 登録情報生成部
8813 機器情報記憶部
8814 通信装置識別情報
8815 利用者情報
8816 電話番号
8817 メールアドレス
8818 ユーザ識別情報
8819 郵便番号
8820 入力部
8821 キー
8822 外部機器情報メモリ
8823 第2暗号部
8824 アクセス制御情報生成部
8825 サーバ情報記憶部
8826 サーバ名
8827 サーバアドレス
8828 ログインアカウント
8829 ログインパスワード
8830 サーバ通信部
8831 IP通信情報記憶部
8832 アドレス
8834 インターネット
8835 通信部
8836 第2復号部
8837 第1復号部
8838 データベース登録部
8839 データベース
8840 表示内容選択部
8841 WEBサーバ
8842 表示部
8850 外部機器ID記憶部
M1001、M1002、M1003 宅内
M1004 インターネット
M1005、N40 登録サーバ
M1006 ルータ
M1007 無線AP
M1008、M1009 TV
M1010 DVDレコーダ
M1011 デジタルカメラ
M1012 電子レンジ
M1013 冷蔵庫
M1014 携帯電話
M1101、Y02 通信装置
M1102、M1102S、M1102R 近接無線通信デバイス
M1103 ホームネットワーク通信デバイス
M1104 ユーザIFデバイス
M1105、Y011、Y022、N34、O64 CPU
M1201 登録機器
M1202 機器固有ID取得部
M1204 登録情報作成部
M1205 ホームID管理部
M1206 位置情報取得部
M1207 登録情報送受信部
M1208 登録データベース
M1101S 送信側通信装置
M1101R 受信側通信装置
M1601 ホームネットワーク
M1209S ホームID記憶部
M1602R ホームID共有部
M1603S ホームネットワーク接続検出部
M1854 通信端末
Y01 端末装置
Y04 サーバ
Y012 故障センシング部
Y013 使用履歴ロギング部
Y014、Y024、N13 メモリ
Y015、Y025 ROM
Y016、Y026 RAM
Y017 変調部
Y018、Y021、N11、O61 アンテナ
Y023 復調部
Y027 位置情報測位部
Y028 経緯測位部(GPS)
Y029 高度測位部
Y030 位置補正部
Y031 GPSアンテナ
Y032 通信メモリ
Y035 情報付与部
Y036、N30、N44、O72 通信部
Y041 機器管理DB
N10、O10、O50 RF-ID
N12 電源部
N13A UID部
N13B 品番ID部
N13C サーバ特定情報
N13D 動作プログラム
N14 再生部
N15 データ転送部
N21、O62 RF-IDリーダライタ
N22、O74 RF-ID記憶部
N23、O65 プログラム実行部
N24、O66 データ処理部
N25、O67 メモリ部
N26、O68d 表示部
N27、N41 通信I/F部
N28、N42、O70 送信部
N29、N43、O71 受信部
N31 GPS
N32 6軸センサ
N33、O73 位置情報記憶部
N45 製品情報管理部
N46 画像データ記憶部
N47 プログラム記憶部
N48 位置情報作成部
N49 製品制御部
N10A、N10I、O50A、O50E テレビ
N10B、O50B BDレコーダ
N10C、N10D、N10F、N10J、O50C、O50D、O50F エアコン
N10K FF暖房機
N10E、N10G 火災報知器
N10I テレビ
N10H 太陽電池パネル
O51 製品ID
O52 第1サーバURL
O53 サービスID
O54 精度識別子
O60 モバイル機器
O63 座標精度識別情報
O67 メモリ部
O68d 表示部
O68 通信アンテナ
O75 RF-ID検出部
O76 URL
O77 再生部
O78 相対位置演算部
O79 座標情報送出部
O80 記録部
O81 建築物座標データ出力部
O82 登録座標
O83 判断部
O84 基準座標
O85 位置情報出力部
O86、O92 位置情報
O87 向き情報
O88 磁気コンパス
O89 地磁気補正部
O90 衛星用アンテナ
O91 位置情報演算部
O93 位置情報補正部
O94 向き情報補正部
O95、O96、O97 角速度センサ
O98、O99、O100 加速度センサ
O101 第1サーバ
O102 登録座標データ
O103 第2サーバ
O104 建築物座標データベース
O105、O106 積分器
O107 絶対座標演算部
Claims (11)
- 近接無線通信により外部機器から受信した外部機器情報を、ネットワークを介してサーバに送信する通信装置であって、
前記外部機器と近接無線通信を行うためのアンテナ部と、
前記アンテナ部を介して前記外部機器と通信し、前記外部機器情報を受信する近接無線通信部と、
前記近接無線通信部が受信した前記外部機器情報を記憶する外部機器記憶部と、
前記外部機器記憶部に記憶された前記外部機器情報と、前記通信装置を識別可能な通信装置識別情報を含む通信装置情報とに基づいて、前記サーバが有するデータベースに登録するための登録情報を生成する登録情報生成部と、
前記ネットワークを介して前記登録情報を前記サーバに送信するサーバ通信部とを備える
通信装置。 - 前記通信装置は、さらに、
前記サーバにアクセスするためのサーバアドレスを含むアクセス制御情報を生成するアクセス制御情報生成部を有し、
前記登録情報生成部は、前記外部機器情報に前記通信装置情報を付与することにより、前記登録情報を生成し、
前記アクセス制御情報生成部は、前記通信情報生成部により生成された前記登録情報に基づいて、前記アクセス制御情報を生成する
請求項1記載の通信装置。 - 前記サーバアドレスは、
前記近接無線通信により前記外部機器から受信した前記外部機器情報から特定される情報である
請求項2記載の通信装置。 - 前記サーバアドレスは、
前記通信装置に含まれており、前記通信装置情報に予め設定されている
請求項2記載の通信装置。 - 前記通信装置は、さらに、
表示部を有し、
前記サーバ通信部は、前記アクセス制御情報に基づいて前記サーバにアクセスし、
前記表示部は、前記サーバからの応答メッセージを表示する
請求項2記載の通信装置。 - 前記登録情報生成部は、
前記通信装置情報を親情報、前記外部機器情報を子情報として、前記データベースに登録するための登録情報を生成する
請求項1記載の通信装置。 - 前記通信装置情報は、
前記通信装置に予め設定されている前記通信装置の利用者特定情報を含む
請求項1記載の通信装置。 - 前記外部機器情報は、前記アンテナ部から出力する電波を受けて前記外部機器が誘起する電源の電源レベルを示す情報を含み、
前記アンテナ部は、前記外部機器情報に基づいて、前記外部機器に出力する電波の強度を変更する
請求項1記載の通信装置。 - 前記外部機器情報は、前記アンテナ部から出力する電波を受けて前記外部機器が誘起する電源の電源レベルを示す情報を含み、
前記近接無線通信部は、前記外部機器情報に基づいて、前記外部機器と近接無線通信の通信路の変調方法を変更する
請求項1記載の通信装置。 - 前記通信装置識別情報は、前記サーバとのIP(Internet Protocol)通信に必要な前記通信機器の通信アドレス情報とは異なる識別情報を含む
請求項1記載の通信装置。 - 外部機器と通信装置とサーバとを備えるシステムであって、
前記外部機器は、
前記通信装置と近接無線通信を行うための第1アンテナ部と、
前記第1アンテナ部を介して前記通信装置と通信し、前記外部機器の情報を示す外部機器情報を送信する変復調部とを備え、
前記通信装置は、
近接無線通信により前記外部機器から受信した前記外部機器情報を、ネットワークを介して前記サーバに送信する通信装置であって、
前記外部機器と近接無線通信を行うための第2アンテナ部と、
前記第2アンテナ部を介して前記外部機器と通信し、前記外部機器情報を受信する近接無線通信部と、
前記近接無線通信部が受信した前記外部機器情報を記憶する外部機器記憶部と、
前記外部機器記憶部に記憶された前記外部機器情報と、前記通信装置を識別可能な通信装置識別情報を含む通信装置情報とに基づいて、前記サーバが有するデータベースに登録するための登録情報を生成する登録情報生成部と、
前記ネットワークを介して前記登録情報を前記サーバに送信するサーバ通信部とを備え、
前記サーバは、
前記ネットワークを介して前記登録情報を前記通信装置より受信する通信部と、
前記通信部により受信された前記登録情報を登録するデータベースとを備える
システム。
Priority Applications (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US12/919,542 US8627075B2 (en) | 2008-12-26 | 2009-12-25 | Communication device that receives external device information from an external device using near field communication |
EP09834538.2A EP2373073B1 (en) | 2008-12-26 | 2009-12-25 | Communication device |
JP2010543926A JP5419895B2 (ja) | 2008-12-26 | 2009-12-25 | 通信装置 |
US14/107,497 US9143933B2 (en) | 2008-12-26 | 2013-12-16 | Communication device that receives external device information from an external device using near field communication |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2008-334203 | 2008-12-26 | ||
JP2008334203 | 2008-12-26 | ||
JP2009-272792 | 2009-11-30 | ||
JP2009272792 | 2009-11-30 |
Related Child Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/919,542 A-371-Of-International US8627075B2 (en) | 2008-12-26 | 2009-12-25 | Communication device that receives external device information from an external device using near field communication |
US14/107,497 Continuation US9143933B2 (en) | 2008-12-26 | 2013-12-16 | Communication device that receives external device information from an external device using near field communication |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2010073732A1 true WO2010073732A1 (ja) | 2010-07-01 |
Family
ID=42287365
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2009/007319 WO2010073732A1 (ja) | 2008-12-26 | 2009-12-25 | 通信装置 |
Country Status (4)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US8627075B2 (ja) |
EP (1) | EP2373073B1 (ja) |
JP (2) | JP5419895B2 (ja) |
WO (1) | WO2010073732A1 (ja) |
Cited By (16)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8068011B1 (en) | 2010-08-27 | 2011-11-29 | Q Street, LLC | System and method for interactive user-directed interfacing between handheld devices and RFID media |
CN102484499A (zh) * | 2010-07-07 | 2012-05-30 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | 通信装置及通信方法 |
WO2013111251A1 (ja) * | 2012-01-25 | 2013-08-01 | パナソニック株式会社 | 鍵管理システム、鍵管理方法、および通信装置 |
JP2014123320A (ja) * | 2012-12-21 | 2014-07-03 | Ricoh Co Ltd | 情報処理装置、情報処理システム及びその制御方法 |
WO2014196076A1 (ja) | 2013-06-07 | 2014-12-11 | 株式会社 東芝 | 端末、電子機器のログイン設定情報の入力方法、コンピュータ読み取り可能な情報記録媒体、電子機器 |
EP2648136A4 (en) * | 2010-11-30 | 2015-05-27 | Panasonic Ip Corp America | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION PROCESS |
KR101553671B1 (ko) | 2014-06-03 | 2015-09-18 | (주) 코콤 | 개인자동화 id키트와 스마트폰과의 일대일 등록방법 |
JP2015531112A (ja) * | 2012-07-16 | 2015-10-29 | クアルコム,インコーポレイテッド | ポータブルトークンデバイス |
EP2645699A4 (en) * | 2010-11-25 | 2015-12-23 | Panasonic Ip Corp America | COMMUNICATION DEVICE |
JP2016042655A (ja) * | 2014-08-18 | 2016-03-31 | キヤノン株式会社 | 通信装置、通信装置の制御方法、プログラム |
CN105872774A (zh) * | 2016-06-16 | 2016-08-17 | 青岛海信电器股份有限公司 | 智能电视错误码显示方法和智能电视 |
WO2018229980A1 (ja) * | 2017-06-16 | 2018-12-20 | 三菱電機株式会社 | 管理システム、サーバ、管理方法、及びプログラム |
US20190080098A1 (en) * | 2010-12-22 | 2019-03-14 | Intel Corporation | System and method to protect user privacy in multimedia uploaded to internet sites |
CN109640374A (zh) * | 2017-10-09 | 2019-04-16 | 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 | 无线网络接入、处理方法、装置、存储介质和计算机设备 |
US20200366797A1 (en) * | 2017-11-14 | 2020-11-19 | Asweshare | Devices and methods for sharing and displaying images |
CN114071191A (zh) * | 2021-11-11 | 2022-02-18 | 温杨玲 | 视频文件加密分发方法及装置 |
Families Citing this family (145)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8060745B2 (en) * | 2003-12-16 | 2011-11-15 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Security for wireless transmission |
WO2009072175A1 (ja) * | 2007-12-03 | 2009-06-11 | Fujitsu Limited | パケット通信装置及びパケット通信方法 |
US8589541B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2013-11-19 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Device-assisted services for protecting network capacity |
US8832777B2 (en) | 2009-03-02 | 2014-09-09 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Adapting network policies based on device service processor configuration |
US8627075B2 (en) | 2008-12-26 | 2014-01-07 | Panasonic Corporation | Communication device that receives external device information from an external device using near field communication |
US10715342B2 (en) * | 2009-01-28 | 2020-07-14 | Headwater Research Llc | Managing service user discovery and service launch object placement on a device |
US9980146B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2018-05-22 | Headwater Research Llc | Communications device with secure data path processing agents |
US10237757B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2019-03-19 | Headwater Research Llc | System and method for wireless network offloading |
US9572019B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2017-02-14 | Headwater Partners LLC | Service selection set published to device agent with on-device service selection |
US10326800B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2019-06-18 | Headwater Research Llc | Wireless network service interfaces |
US9706061B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2017-07-11 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Service design center for device assisted services |
US10798252B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2020-10-06 | Headwater Research Llc | System and method for providing user notifications |
US9565707B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2017-02-07 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Wireless end-user device with wireless data attribution to multiple personas |
US8718707B2 (en) * | 2009-03-20 | 2014-05-06 | Johnson Controls Technology Company | Devices, systems, and methods for communicating with rooftop air handling units and other HVAC components |
JP4826646B2 (ja) * | 2009-03-24 | 2011-11-30 | 富士ゼロックス株式会社 | 画像形成装置 |
USRE45980E1 (en) | 2009-11-30 | 2016-04-19 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Communication device |
EP2509334B1 (en) | 2009-11-30 | 2018-09-12 | Sun Patent Trust | Communication apparatus |
CN102301353A (zh) | 2009-11-30 | 2011-12-28 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | 便携型通信装置、通信方法、集成电路、程序 |
US8660545B1 (en) * | 2010-01-06 | 2014-02-25 | ILook Corporation | Responding to a video request by displaying information on a TV remote and video on the TV |
JP2011160300A (ja) * | 2010-02-02 | 2011-08-18 | Fujitsu Ltd | ルータ、ルーティング方法、ルーティングプログラム、情報処理装置、仮想マシン構築方法および仮想マシン構築プログラム |
WO2011118122A1 (ja) * | 2010-03-23 | 2011-09-29 | パナソニック株式会社 | ユーザインタフェース表示を制御するサーバ装置、方法、プログラム、および集積回路 |
JP5661313B2 (ja) * | 2010-03-30 | 2015-01-28 | キヤノン株式会社 | 記憶装置 |
US20110248877A1 (en) | 2010-04-12 | 2011-10-13 | Jeyhan Karaoguz | System and method providing remote user selection of a device |
JP5486997B2 (ja) * | 2010-04-14 | 2014-05-07 | 株式会社ソニー・コンピュータエンタテインメント | ユーザ支援システム、ユーザ支援方法、管理サーバ及び携帯情報端末 |
US8627420B2 (en) * | 2010-04-22 | 2014-01-07 | Cisco Technologies, Inc. | Apparatus for associating a client device or service with a wireless network |
CN101860988A (zh) * | 2010-05-17 | 2010-10-13 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | 一种基于位置区域的无线通信终端业务控制方法和装置 |
US8874891B2 (en) * | 2010-05-20 | 2014-10-28 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Systems and methods for activation of applications using client-specific data |
EP2405650A1 (en) * | 2010-07-09 | 2012-01-11 | Nagravision S.A. | A method for secure transfer of messages |
US8464061B2 (en) * | 2010-08-30 | 2013-06-11 | Apple Inc. | Secure wireless link between two devices using probes |
KR20120048312A (ko) * | 2010-11-05 | 2012-05-15 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 모바일 장치 및 그 제어방법 |
US9288300B2 (en) * | 2010-12-28 | 2016-03-15 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Communication apparatus and communication method |
EP2661869B1 (fr) * | 2011-01-05 | 2018-12-26 | Connecthings | Système pour actionner un terminal portable |
JP5287902B2 (ja) * | 2011-02-28 | 2013-09-11 | カシオ計算機株式会社 | Rfid通信装置及びプログラム |
US8904289B2 (en) * | 2011-04-21 | 2014-12-02 | Touchstream Technologies, Inc. | Play control of content on a display device |
US9767195B2 (en) | 2011-04-21 | 2017-09-19 | Touchstream Technologies, Inc. | Virtualized hosting and displaying of content using a swappable media player |
US8816820B2 (en) * | 2011-04-28 | 2014-08-26 | Honeywell International Inc. | System for synthetic vision |
US10715380B2 (en) | 2011-05-23 | 2020-07-14 | Apple Inc. | Setting a reminder that is triggered by a target user device |
US8971924B2 (en) | 2011-05-23 | 2015-03-03 | Apple Inc. | Identifying and locating users on a mobile network |
TWI459829B (zh) * | 2011-05-31 | 2014-11-01 | Ibm | 基於與鄰近無線裝置建立之連結而驅動一想要執行之事件的方法、行動裝置及電腦程式產品 |
US9793962B2 (en) * | 2011-06-10 | 2017-10-17 | Amx Llc | Processing near field communications between active/passive devices and a control system |
JP5719244B2 (ja) * | 2011-06-29 | 2015-05-13 | インターナショナル・ビジネス・マシーンズ・コーポレーションInternational Business Machines Corporation | 安全に管理された仮想マシンの実行環境を構築する方法、プログラムおよびコンピュータ装置 |
KR101276857B1 (ko) | 2011-07-27 | 2013-06-18 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 가전제품 및 이를 포함하여 이루어지는 온라인 시스템 |
KR101276861B1 (ko) * | 2011-07-27 | 2013-06-18 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 가전제품 및 이를 포함하여 이루어지는 온라인 시스템 |
KR101909026B1 (ko) * | 2011-08-19 | 2018-10-17 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 전기제품 정보 관리 시스템 |
KR101819510B1 (ko) | 2011-08-22 | 2018-01-17 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 세탁장치 및 이를 포함하여 이루어지는 온라인 시스템 |
US9078078B1 (en) | 2011-09-15 | 2015-07-07 | Google Inc. | Call forwarding methods and systems |
KR101923487B1 (ko) | 2011-09-29 | 2018-11-30 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | 통신 연결 서비스 제공 방법 및 장치 |
US10225242B2 (en) * | 2011-10-25 | 2019-03-05 | Salesforce.Com, Inc. | Automated authorization response techniques |
US10212588B2 (en) * | 2011-10-25 | 2019-02-19 | Salesforce.Com, Inc. | Preemptive authorization automation |
US10225264B2 (en) | 2011-10-25 | 2019-03-05 | Salesforce.Com, Inc. | Automated authorization response techniques |
US9372254B2 (en) | 2011-10-31 | 2016-06-21 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Position estimation device, position estimation method, program and integrated circuit |
TWI523144B (zh) * | 2011-10-31 | 2016-02-21 | 財團法人國家實驗研究院國家晶片系統設計中心 | 具有履歷電路單元之晶片結構 |
JP6026890B2 (ja) | 2011-10-31 | 2016-11-16 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカPanasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | 位置推定装置、位置推定方法、プログラムおよび集積回路 |
US8949954B2 (en) * | 2011-12-08 | 2015-02-03 | Uniloc Luxembourg, S.A. | Customer notification program alerting customer-specified network address of unauthorized access attempts to customer account |
US9131370B2 (en) | 2011-12-29 | 2015-09-08 | Mcafee, Inc. | Simplified mobile communication device |
AU2012100460B4 (en) | 2012-01-04 | 2012-11-08 | Uniloc Usa, Inc. | Method and system implementing zone-restricted behavior of a computing device |
AU2012100462B4 (en) | 2012-02-06 | 2012-11-08 | Uniloc Usa, Inc. | Near field authentication through communication of enclosed content sound waves |
JP5950151B2 (ja) * | 2012-02-28 | 2016-07-13 | ソニー株式会社 | 電子機器、電源制御方法、およびプログラム |
JP2013196508A (ja) * | 2012-03-21 | 2013-09-30 | Ricoh Co Ltd | 機器管理システム、機器管理方法、サーバ装置、及び機器管理プログラム |
JP2013207357A (ja) * | 2012-03-27 | 2013-10-07 | Sony Corp | サーバ、クライアント端末、システムおよびプログラム |
US8819445B2 (en) | 2012-04-09 | 2014-08-26 | Mcafee, Inc. | Wireless token authentication |
US9262592B2 (en) * | 2012-04-09 | 2016-02-16 | Mcafee, Inc. | Wireless storage device |
US9547761B2 (en) | 2012-04-09 | 2017-01-17 | Mcafee, Inc. | Wireless token device |
US20130268687A1 (en) | 2012-04-09 | 2013-10-10 | Mcafee, Inc. | Wireless token device |
US9560047B1 (en) * | 2012-05-25 | 2017-01-31 | Sprint Communications Company L.P. | Multi-device authorization to access wireless network communications based on shared event times |
US9104896B2 (en) * | 2012-06-04 | 2015-08-11 | Apple Inc. | System and method for remotely initiating lost mode on a computing device |
KR20130137379A (ko) * | 2012-06-07 | 2013-12-17 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 홈 네트워크에서 사용자 정보를 저장하는 장치 및 방법 |
JP6057565B2 (ja) * | 2012-07-04 | 2017-01-11 | キヤノン株式会社 | 画像処理装置、画像処理装置の制御方法、およびプログラム |
WO2014021005A1 (ja) * | 2012-07-31 | 2014-02-06 | 日本電気株式会社 | 画像処理システム、画像処理方法及びプログラム |
CN103581698B (zh) * | 2012-07-31 | 2017-05-24 | 联想(北京)有限公司 | 终端设备以及视频数据发布方法 |
JP2014032501A (ja) * | 2012-08-02 | 2014-02-20 | Sony Corp | 情報処理装置および情報処理方法 |
JP5652439B2 (ja) * | 2012-08-09 | 2015-01-14 | コニカミノルタ株式会社 | 画像形成システム、連携方法および画像形成装置 |
WO2014034116A1 (ja) * | 2012-08-30 | 2014-03-06 | パナソニック株式会社 | 情報管理方法、情報管理装置、プログラム、およびプログラム提供方法 |
CN104885065A (zh) * | 2012-08-31 | 2015-09-02 | 游戏大厅股份有限公司 | 通过使用远程设备与显示屏进行通信和互动的系统和方法 |
KR101866860B1 (ko) | 2012-09-04 | 2018-06-14 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 전자기기 및 그것의 제어방법 |
KR101797493B1 (ko) | 2012-09-06 | 2017-11-15 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 가전제품 및 이를 포함하여 이루어지는 온라인 시스템 |
KR20140032262A (ko) | 2012-09-06 | 2014-03-14 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 가전제품 및 이를 포함하여 이루어지는 온라인 시스템 |
JP5662978B2 (ja) * | 2012-09-07 | 2015-02-04 | 株式会社東芝 | 携帯無線装置、無線通信方法および通信装置 |
WO2014057634A1 (ja) * | 2012-10-10 | 2014-04-17 | パナソニック株式会社 | 通信装置、通信システム、携帯端末、プログラム、及びサーバ |
US9094822B2 (en) * | 2012-10-18 | 2015-07-28 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | Seamless telephone login |
US9631934B2 (en) | 2012-10-23 | 2017-04-25 | Bmc Software, Inc. | Management of annotated location aware assets |
US9088450B2 (en) * | 2012-10-31 | 2015-07-21 | Elwha Llc | Methods and systems for data services |
JP5983380B2 (ja) * | 2012-12-11 | 2016-08-31 | 富士通株式会社 | 移動局装置、通信システム、通信方法及びコンピュータプログラム |
WO2014103020A1 (ja) * | 2012-12-28 | 2014-07-03 | 富士通株式会社 | ファイル選択システム、情報処理装置、端末装置、ファイル選択方法およびプログラム |
JP6080548B2 (ja) * | 2012-12-28 | 2017-02-15 | キヤノン株式会社 | 通信装置、情報端末、それらの制御方法、プログラム |
CN103139378A (zh) * | 2012-12-31 | 2013-06-05 | 威盛电子股份有限公司 | 移动终端装置及自动开启该装置的声音输出接口的方法 |
US8934886B2 (en) * | 2012-12-31 | 2015-01-13 | Via Technologies, Inc. | Mobile apparatus and method of voice communication |
CN103095813A (zh) * | 2012-12-31 | 2013-05-08 | 威盛电子股份有限公司 | 语音交互系统、移动终端装置及语音通信的方法 |
AU2013100355B4 (en) * | 2013-02-28 | 2013-10-31 | Netauthority, Inc | Device-specific content delivery |
JP6103997B2 (ja) * | 2013-03-14 | 2017-03-29 | キヤノン株式会社 | 印刷装置及びその制御方法、プログラム |
JP5954238B2 (ja) * | 2013-03-29 | 2016-07-20 | ブラザー工業株式会社 | 通信装置、およびプログラム |
JP6103392B2 (ja) * | 2013-03-29 | 2017-03-29 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | 蓄電池パック、電気機器、通信制御方法 |
US9246892B2 (en) | 2013-04-03 | 2016-01-26 | Salesforce.Com, Inc. | System, method and computer program product for managing access to systems, products, and data based on information associated with a physical location of a user |
KR102046094B1 (ko) * | 2013-04-23 | 2019-11-18 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 전자 기기 및 이의 개인 클라우드 기기 등록 방법 |
US20140325027A1 (en) * | 2013-04-24 | 2014-10-30 | Xiaomi Inc. | Method and terminal device for requesting and presenting data |
KR101964229B1 (ko) * | 2013-07-26 | 2019-04-01 | 한화테크윈 주식회사 | 감시 서버, 감시 서버의 데이터 처리 방법, 및 감시 시스템 |
US9781064B2 (en) * | 2013-08-03 | 2017-10-03 | Robert Jacobs | Method and system for creating and distributing electronic postcards |
JP6313014B2 (ja) * | 2013-08-27 | 2018-04-18 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | カメラシステム、冷蔵庫 |
CN105474658B (zh) | 2013-08-30 | 2018-11-16 | 麦克赛尔株式会社 | 终端装置和遥控方法 |
US9754097B2 (en) * | 2014-02-21 | 2017-09-05 | Liveensure, Inc. | Method for peer to peer mobile context authentication |
US9686077B2 (en) * | 2014-03-06 | 2017-06-20 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Secure hardware for cross-device trusted applications |
US9542558B2 (en) * | 2014-03-12 | 2017-01-10 | Apple Inc. | Secure factory data generation and restoration |
KR102213448B1 (ko) * | 2014-04-04 | 2021-02-08 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | 전자 장치의 인증 상태를 제어하는 방법 및 이를 이용한 전자 장치 |
JP6368531B2 (ja) * | 2014-04-28 | 2018-08-01 | 達広 白井 | 暗号処理装置、暗号処理システム、および暗号処理方法 |
JP6312519B2 (ja) * | 2014-05-13 | 2018-04-18 | キヤノン株式会社 | 撮像装置、その制御方法、及びプログラム |
US9294575B1 (en) * | 2014-06-04 | 2016-03-22 | Grandios Technologies, Inc. | Transmitting appliance-specific content to a user device |
US9460688B2 (en) * | 2014-06-16 | 2016-10-04 | Rod G. Kosann | Electronic display locket and system |
JP6071949B2 (ja) * | 2014-06-25 | 2017-02-01 | キヤノン株式会社 | 情報処理装置、その制御方法、及びプログラム |
US9332150B2 (en) * | 2014-08-25 | 2016-05-03 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Text scanning system, image processing apparatus, and text scanning method |
US10020951B2 (en) * | 2014-09-17 | 2018-07-10 | Ca, Inc. | Crowdsourcing-based detection, identification, and tracking of electronic devices |
US9682598B2 (en) * | 2015-03-10 | 2017-06-20 | Itire, Llc | Smart tag assembly for mounting on an object to be tracked |
US10204297B2 (en) | 2014-10-06 | 2019-02-12 | Itire, Llc | Smart tag assembly for mounting on an object to be tracked |
CN105741532B (zh) | 2014-12-11 | 2019-08-16 | 华为终端有限公司 | 具有红外遥控功能的终端,以及红外遥控配对方法 |
CN105812404A (zh) * | 2014-12-29 | 2016-07-27 | 罗伯特·博世有限公司 | 车辆诊断设备数据升级方法、装置及车辆诊断设备 |
US9531345B2 (en) * | 2015-02-19 | 2016-12-27 | Motorola Mobility Llc | Antenna tuning in a modular portable communication device |
US9825969B2 (en) * | 2015-09-14 | 2017-11-21 | D&M Holdings, Inc. | System and method for controlling a rendering device based upon detected user proximity |
FR3041797B1 (fr) * | 2015-09-30 | 2018-09-07 | Schneider Electric Industries Sas | Procede de configuration et d'utilisation securisee d'un systeme de modules de surveillance et/ou de controle |
JP6664411B2 (ja) * | 2015-11-11 | 2020-03-13 | パイオニア株式会社 | セキュリティ装置、セキュリティ制御方法、プログラム及び記憶媒体 |
JP6184580B1 (ja) * | 2016-01-29 | 2017-08-23 | キヤノン株式会社 | 情報処理装置、制御方法およびプログラム |
JP6569567B2 (ja) * | 2016-03-11 | 2019-09-04 | 富士ゼロックス株式会社 | 情報処理装置、情報処理システム及び情報処理プログラム |
KR102475927B1 (ko) | 2016-04-28 | 2022-12-08 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 스크랩 기능을 제공하는 디스플레이 장치 및 그의 동작 방법 |
DE102016208453A1 (de) * | 2016-05-17 | 2017-12-07 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Verfahren zur Erzeugung eines Geheimnisses oder eines Schlüssels in einem Netzwerk |
CN107962573A (zh) * | 2016-10-20 | 2018-04-27 | 富泰华工业(深圳)有限公司 | 陪伴型机器人及机器人控制方法 |
US10798538B2 (en) | 2017-01-20 | 2020-10-06 | Bmc Software, Inc. | Asset floor map |
US11860819B1 (en) * | 2017-06-29 | 2024-01-02 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Auto-generation of partition key |
EP3655929A1 (en) * | 2017-07-18 | 2020-05-27 | Assa Abloy AB | Perimeter offline secure exchange of access control token |
JP6694461B2 (ja) * | 2018-03-14 | 2020-05-13 | 日立グローバルライフソリューションズ株式会社 | 接続ルータ判定方法、および、機器制御システム |
CN111860020A (zh) | 2018-04-25 | 2020-10-30 | 创新先进技术有限公司 | 业务处理方法、装置以及设备 |
US10812476B2 (en) | 2018-05-22 | 2020-10-20 | Salesforce.Com, Inc. | Authorization of another device for participation in multi-factor authentication |
US11231848B2 (en) * | 2018-06-28 | 2022-01-25 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Non-positive index values of panel input sources |
US11108764B2 (en) | 2018-07-02 | 2021-08-31 | Salesforce.Com, Inc. | Automating responses to authentication requests using unsupervised computer learning techniques |
JP7107066B2 (ja) * | 2018-07-27 | 2022-07-27 | 株式会社リコー | 機器管理装置、機器管理プログラム及び機器管理システム |
US10785223B2 (en) * | 2018-10-19 | 2020-09-22 | Honda Motor Co., Ltd. | Authentication and registration system |
US10826903B2 (en) * | 2018-10-19 | 2020-11-03 | Honda Motor Co., Ltd. | Authentication and registration system |
KR20200068884A (ko) * | 2018-12-06 | 2020-06-16 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 디스플레이 장치 및 그 제어 방법 |
US10807766B2 (en) * | 2019-03-15 | 2020-10-20 | Apple Inc. | Packaging with radio-frequency authentication system for packaged product |
KR102631408B1 (ko) | 2019-05-08 | 2024-01-31 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 전자 장치 및 전자 장치의 제어 방법 |
JP7258131B2 (ja) * | 2019-05-30 | 2023-04-14 | 三菱電機株式会社 | 接続管理装置、接続管理システム、接続管理方法及びプログラム |
FR3099014B1 (fr) * | 2019-07-15 | 2021-07-09 | Somfy Activites Sa | Procédé de configuration de la communication entre au moins un actionneur et une télécommande |
US11435968B2 (en) * | 2019-09-30 | 2022-09-06 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Method for information processing apparatus, information processing apparatus, and method for communication system |
US11606477B2 (en) * | 2020-01-20 | 2023-03-14 | Instituto De Pesquisas Eldorado | Multispectral camera |
CN114365067A (zh) * | 2020-06-02 | 2022-04-15 | 海信视像科技股份有限公司 | 服务器设备、广播接收装置、服务器管理设备及信息联动系统 |
CN114298392B (zh) * | 2021-12-23 | 2023-05-12 | 电子科技大学 | 一种面向森林火灾的火线经纬度预测方法 |
JP2023111200A (ja) * | 2022-01-31 | 2023-08-10 | 京セラドキュメントソリューションズ株式会社 | 画像形成システム |
DE102022119591B4 (de) * | 2022-08-04 | 2024-03-21 | Wittenstein Se | Verfahren zur Bereitstellung von Antriebsdaten und Computersystem |
Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2003296237A (ja) * | 2002-04-05 | 2003-10-17 | Ricoh Co Ltd | 電子掲示板システム |
JP2005063427A (ja) | 2003-07-28 | 2005-03-10 | Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd | 情報配信システム、サーバ、読取装置及び表示装置 |
JP2007043316A (ja) * | 2005-08-01 | 2007-02-15 | Sony Ericsson Mobilecommunications Japan Inc | レベル/周波数変換回路及び方法、a/d変換回路及び方法、信号レベル通知装置及び方法、携帯通信端末、非接触通信システム |
WO2007069323A1 (ja) * | 2005-12-15 | 2007-06-21 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | ユーザ登録代行サーバ、通信端末装置、ユーザ登録方法、及びユーザ登録システム |
JP2007304787A (ja) * | 2006-05-10 | 2007-11-22 | Hitachi Information & Communication Engineering Ltd | 遠隔操作システム、制御方法、及び、制御プログラム |
Family Cites Families (34)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5648813A (en) | 1993-10-20 | 1997-07-15 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co. Ltd. | Graphical-interactive-screen display apparatus and peripheral units |
JP3035877B2 (ja) | 1993-11-10 | 2000-04-24 | 松下電器産業株式会社 | リモコン装置 |
JPH09116985A (ja) | 1995-10-13 | 1997-05-02 | Sony Corp | 遠隔操作器、遠隔操作制御方法及び装置 |
JP4190599B2 (ja) * | 1996-11-27 | 2008-12-03 | ソニー株式会社 | 情報伝送装置及び情報伝送方法並びに情報受信装置及び情報受信方法 |
US6148211A (en) | 1997-09-05 | 2000-11-14 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and system for estimating a subscriber's location in a cluttered area |
JP4644900B2 (ja) * | 2000-03-07 | 2011-03-09 | ソニー株式会社 | 通信手段を介したサービス提供システム、サービス提供方法、およびサービス仲介装置、並びにプログラム提供媒体 |
JP2003234840A (ja) * | 2002-02-12 | 2003-08-22 | Seiko Epson Corp | 連絡支援装置及び連絡支援プログラム、並びに連絡支援方法 |
JP4205357B2 (ja) | 2002-03-29 | 2009-01-07 | ブラザー工業株式会社 | サービス提供システム、機器及びサービス提供方法 |
JP2004166193A (ja) | 2002-09-27 | 2004-06-10 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | リモコン装置 |
JP4207557B2 (ja) | 2002-12-18 | 2009-01-14 | ソニー株式会社 | 無線通信方法、無線通信システム及び無線通信装置 |
US20050027828A1 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2005-02-03 | Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. | Information distribution system, server, reading device, and display device |
JP4548164B2 (ja) | 2005-03-18 | 2010-09-22 | 株式会社ニコン | 流通管理システム |
WO2006101035A1 (ja) | 2005-03-18 | 2006-09-28 | Nikon Corporation | デジタルカメラ |
JP2006266945A (ja) | 2005-03-24 | 2006-10-05 | Matsushita Electric Works Ltd | 位置管理システム |
US7895450B2 (en) * | 2006-01-09 | 2011-02-22 | Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. | Data management system, data management method and storage medium storing program for data management |
JP2007228497A (ja) | 2006-02-27 | 2007-09-06 | Kyocera Corp | 無線通信装置および無線通信方法 |
WO2007106844A2 (en) * | 2006-03-14 | 2007-09-20 | Divx, Inc. | Federated digital rights management scheme including trusted systems |
JP2008170309A (ja) | 2007-01-12 | 2008-07-24 | Seiko Epson Corp | 携帯ナビゲーションシステム、携帯ナビゲーション方法、携帯ナビゲーション用プログラム及び携帯端末 |
US8522019B2 (en) * | 2007-02-23 | 2013-08-27 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus to create trust domains based on proximity |
JP4925116B2 (ja) | 2007-05-18 | 2012-04-25 | シャープ株式会社 | サービス管理装置、移動端末装置、サービス管理システム、サービス管理方法、およびサービス管理プログラム |
GB2449510A (en) * | 2007-05-24 | 2008-11-26 | Asim Bucuk | A method and system for the creation, management and authentication of links between people, entities, objects and devices |
JP5070579B2 (ja) | 2007-06-11 | 2012-11-14 | シャープ株式会社 | 情報通信端末および処理プログラム |
CN101990661B (zh) * | 2007-12-28 | 2013-11-06 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | 通信装置、通信系统、图像提示方法以及程序 |
JP2009193433A (ja) | 2008-02-15 | 2009-08-27 | Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd | 電気機器管理システム、電気機器管理サーバおよび電気機器管理方法 |
JP5309643B2 (ja) | 2008-03-24 | 2013-10-09 | 富士通株式会社 | 位置情報処理装置、位置情報処理プログラムおよび移動体端末 |
JP2010147847A (ja) | 2008-12-19 | 2010-07-01 | Kyocera Corp | 基地局装置および基地局制御方法 |
US8627075B2 (en) | 2008-12-26 | 2014-01-07 | Panasonic Corporation | Communication device that receives external device information from an external device using near field communication |
EP2509334B1 (en) | 2009-11-30 | 2018-09-12 | Sun Patent Trust | Communication apparatus |
CN102301353A (zh) | 2009-11-30 | 2011-12-28 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | 便携型通信装置、通信方法、集成电路、程序 |
EP2645699B1 (en) | 2010-11-25 | 2020-08-05 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | Communication device |
JP5873867B2 (ja) | 2011-06-13 | 2016-03-01 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブアメリカPanasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | ノイズパターン取得装置、および、それを備える位置検知装置 |
US9214128B2 (en) | 2011-08-10 | 2015-12-15 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Information display device |
JP6026890B2 (ja) | 2011-10-31 | 2016-11-16 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカPanasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | 位置推定装置、位置推定方法、プログラムおよび集積回路 |
US9372254B2 (en) | 2011-10-31 | 2016-06-21 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Position estimation device, position estimation method, program and integrated circuit |
-
2009
- 2009-12-25 US US12/919,542 patent/US8627075B2/en active Active
- 2009-12-25 WO PCT/JP2009/007319 patent/WO2010073732A1/ja active Application Filing
- 2009-12-25 JP JP2010543926A patent/JP5419895B2/ja active Active
- 2009-12-25 EP EP09834538.2A patent/EP2373073B1/en active Active
-
2013
- 2013-11-19 JP JP2013239353A patent/JP5707472B2/ja active Active
- 2013-12-16 US US14/107,497 patent/US9143933B2/en active Active
Patent Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2003296237A (ja) * | 2002-04-05 | 2003-10-17 | Ricoh Co Ltd | 電子掲示板システム |
JP2005063427A (ja) | 2003-07-28 | 2005-03-10 | Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd | 情報配信システム、サーバ、読取装置及び表示装置 |
JP2007043316A (ja) * | 2005-08-01 | 2007-02-15 | Sony Ericsson Mobilecommunications Japan Inc | レベル/周波数変換回路及び方法、a/d変換回路及び方法、信号レベル通知装置及び方法、携帯通信端末、非接触通信システム |
WO2007069323A1 (ja) * | 2005-12-15 | 2007-06-21 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | ユーザ登録代行サーバ、通信端末装置、ユーザ登録方法、及びユーザ登録システム |
JP2007304787A (ja) * | 2006-05-10 | 2007-11-22 | Hitachi Information & Communication Engineering Ltd | 遠隔操作システム、制御方法、及び、制御プログラム |
Non-Patent Citations (1)
Title |
---|
See also references of EP2373073A4 |
Cited By (23)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN102484499A (zh) * | 2010-07-07 | 2012-05-30 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | 通信装置及通信方法 |
CN102484499B (zh) * | 2010-07-07 | 2015-06-17 | 松下电器(美国)知识产权公司 | 通信装置及通信方法 |
US8395486B2 (en) | 2010-08-27 | 2013-03-12 | Q Street, LLC | System and method for interactive user-directed interfacing between handheld devices and RFID media |
US9858455B2 (en) | 2010-08-27 | 2018-01-02 | Q Street, LLC | System and method for interactive user-directed interfacing between handheld devices and RFID media |
US8068011B1 (en) | 2010-08-27 | 2011-11-29 | Q Street, LLC | System and method for interactive user-directed interfacing between handheld devices and RFID media |
EP2645699A4 (en) * | 2010-11-25 | 2015-12-23 | Panasonic Ip Corp America | COMMUNICATION DEVICE |
US9071955B2 (en) | 2010-11-30 | 2015-06-30 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Communication device and communication method |
EP2648136A4 (en) * | 2010-11-30 | 2015-05-27 | Panasonic Ip Corp America | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION PROCESS |
US20190080098A1 (en) * | 2010-12-22 | 2019-03-14 | Intel Corporation | System and method to protect user privacy in multimedia uploaded to internet sites |
WO2013111251A1 (ja) * | 2012-01-25 | 2013-08-01 | パナソニック株式会社 | 鍵管理システム、鍵管理方法、および通信装置 |
JPWO2013111251A1 (ja) * | 2012-01-25 | 2015-05-11 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | 鍵管理システム、鍵管理方法、および通信装置 |
US9258283B2 (en) | 2012-01-25 | 2016-02-09 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Management Co., Ltd. | Key management system, key management method, and communication device |
JP2015531112A (ja) * | 2012-07-16 | 2015-10-29 | クアルコム,インコーポレイテッド | ポータブルトークンデバイス |
JP2014123320A (ja) * | 2012-12-21 | 2014-07-03 | Ricoh Co Ltd | 情報処理装置、情報処理システム及びその制御方法 |
WO2014196076A1 (ja) | 2013-06-07 | 2014-12-11 | 株式会社 東芝 | 端末、電子機器のログイン設定情報の入力方法、コンピュータ読み取り可能な情報記録媒体、電子機器 |
KR101553671B1 (ko) | 2014-06-03 | 2015-09-18 | (주) 코콤 | 개인자동화 id키트와 스마트폰과의 일대일 등록방법 |
JP2016042655A (ja) * | 2014-08-18 | 2016-03-31 | キヤノン株式会社 | 通信装置、通信装置の制御方法、プログラム |
CN105872774A (zh) * | 2016-06-16 | 2016-08-17 | 青岛海信电器股份有限公司 | 智能电视错误码显示方法和智能电视 |
WO2018229980A1 (ja) * | 2017-06-16 | 2018-12-20 | 三菱電機株式会社 | 管理システム、サーバ、管理方法、及びプログラム |
JPWO2018229980A1 (ja) * | 2017-06-16 | 2019-11-07 | 三菱電機株式会社 | 管理システム、サーバ、管理方法、及びプログラム |
CN109640374A (zh) * | 2017-10-09 | 2019-04-16 | 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 | 无线网络接入、处理方法、装置、存储介质和计算机设备 |
US20200366797A1 (en) * | 2017-11-14 | 2020-11-19 | Asweshare | Devices and methods for sharing and displaying images |
CN114071191A (zh) * | 2021-11-11 | 2022-02-18 | 温杨玲 | 视频文件加密分发方法及装置 |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JPWO2010073732A1 (ja) | 2012-06-14 |
JP2014123350A (ja) | 2014-07-03 |
EP2373073B1 (en) | 2016-11-09 |
US20140105397A1 (en) | 2014-04-17 |
JP5419895B2 (ja) | 2014-02-19 |
US20110007901A1 (en) | 2011-01-13 |
EP2373073A4 (en) | 2014-02-26 |
JP5707472B2 (ja) | 2015-04-30 |
US9143933B2 (en) | 2015-09-22 |
EP2373073A1 (en) | 2011-10-05 |
US8627075B2 (en) | 2014-01-07 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP5707472B2 (ja) | 通信装置 | |
JP6068576B2 (ja) | 通信装置 | |
WO2011065007A1 (ja) | 携帯型通信装置、通信方法、集積回路、プログラム | |
JP5323891B2 (ja) | 通信装置および通信システム | |
JP5886205B2 (ja) | 通信機器 | |
EP2448262A1 (en) | Communication apparatus | |
USRE45980E1 (en) | Communication device |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2010543926 Country of ref document: JP |
|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 09834538 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
REEP | Request for entry into the european phase |
Ref document number: 2009834538 Country of ref document: EP |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 12919542 Country of ref document: US Ref document number: 2009834538 Country of ref document: EP |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |